perlapi(1)
NAME
perlapi - autogenerated documentation for the perl public API
DESCRIPTION
This file contains the documentation of the perl public API generated by embed.pl, specifically a listing of functions, macros, flags, and variables that may be used by extension writers. At the end is a list of functions which have yet to be documented. The interfaces of those are subject to change without notice. Anything not listed here is not part of the public API, and should not be used by extension writers at all. For these reasons, blindly using functions listed in proto.h is to be avoided when writing extensions. In Perl, unlike C, a string of characters may generally contain embedded "NUL" characters. Sometimes in the documentation a Perl string is referred to as a "buffer" to distinguish it from a C string, but sometimes they are both just referred to as strings. Note that all Perl API global variables must be referenced with the "PL_" prefix. Again, those not listed here are not to be used by extension writers, and can be changed or removed without notice; same with macros. Some macros are provided for compatibility with the older, unadorned names, but this support may be disabled in a future release. Perl was originally written to handle US-ASCII only (that is characters whose ordinal numbers are in the range 0 - 127). And documentation and comments may still use the term ASCII, when sometimes in fact the entire range from 0 - 255 is meant. The non-ASCII characters below 256 can have various meanings, depending on various things. (See, most notably, perllocale.) But usually the whole range can be referred to as ISO-8859-1. Often, the term "Latin-1" (or "Latin1") is used as an equivalent for ISO-8859-1. But some people treat "Latin1" as referring just to the characters in the range 128 through 255, or somethimes from 160 through 255. This documentation uses "Latin1" and "Latin-1" to refer to all 256 characters. Note that Perl can be compiled and run under either ASCII or EBCDIC (See perlebcdic). Most of the documentation (and even comments in the code) ignore the EBCDIC possibility. For almost all purposes the differences are transparent. As an example, under EBCDIC, instead of UTF-8, UTF-EBCDIC is used to encode Unicode strings, and so whenever this documentation refers to "utf8" (and variants of that name, including in function names), it also (essentially transparently) means "UTF-EBCDIC". But the ordinals of characters differ between ASCII, EBCDIC, and the UTF- encodings, and a string encoded in UTF-EBCDIC may occupy a different number of bytes than in UTF-8. The listing below is alphabetical, case insensitive.
Array Manipulation Functions
av_clear
Frees the all the elements of an array, leaving it empty. The
XS equivalent of "@array = ()". See also "av_undef".
Note that it is possible that the actions of a destructor
called directly or indirectly by freeing an element of the
array could cause the reference count of the array itself to be
reduced (e.g. by deleting an entry in the symbol table). So it
is a possibility that the AV could have been freed (or even
reallocated) on return from the call unless you hold a
reference to it.
void av_clear(AV *av)
av_create_and_push
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Push an SV onto the end of the array, creating the array if
necessary. A small internal helper function to remove a
commonly duplicated idiom.
void av_create_and_push(AV **const avp,
SV *const val)
av_create_and_unshift_one
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Unshifts an SV onto the beginning of the array, creating the
array if necessary. A small internal helper function to remove
a commonly duplicated idiom.
SV** av_create_and_unshift_one(AV **const avp,
SV *const val)
av_delete
Deletes the element indexed by "key" from the array, makes the
element mortal, and returns it. If "flags" equals "G_DISCARD",
the element is freed and null is returned. Perl equivalent:
"my$elem=delete($myarray[$idx]);" for the non-"G_DISCARD"
version and a void-context "delete($myarray[$idx]);" for the
"G_DISCARD" version.
SV* av_delete(AV *av, SSize_t key, I32 flags)
av_exists
Returns true if the element indexed by "key" has been
initialized.
This relies on the fact that uninitialized array elements are
set to "NULL".
Perl equivalent: "exists($myarray[$key])".
bool av_exists(AV *av, SSize_t key)
av_extend
Pre-extend an array. The "key" is the index to which the array
should be extended.
void av_extend(AV *av, SSize_t key)
av_fetch
Returns the SV at the specified index in the array. The "key"
is the index. If lval is true, you are guaranteed to get a
real SV back (in case it wasn't real before), which you can
then modify. Check that the return value is non-null before
dereferencing it to a "SV*".
See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in
perlguts for more information on how to use this function on
tied arrays.
The rough perl equivalent is $myarray[$idx].
SV** av_fetch(AV *av, SSize_t key, I32 lval)
AvFILL Same as "av_top_index()". Deprecated, use "av_top_index()"
instead.
int AvFILL(AV* av)
av_fill Set the highest index in the array to the given number,
equivalent to Perl's "$#array=$fill;".
The number of elements in the array will be "fill+1" after
"av_fill()" returns. If the array was previously shorter, then
the additional elements appended are set to NULL. If the array
was longer, then the excess elements are freed.
"av_fill(av,-1)" is the same as "av_clear(av)".
void av_fill(AV *av, SSize_t fill)
av_len Same as "av_top_index". Note that, unlike what the name
implies, it returns the highest index in the array, so to get
the size of the array you need to use "av_len(av)+1". This
is unlike "sv_len", which returns what you would expect.
SSize_t av_len(AV *av)
av_make Creates a new AV and populates it with a list of SVs. The SVs
are copied into the array, so they may be freed after the call
to "av_make". The new AV will have a reference count of 1.
Perl equivalent: "my @new_array = ($scalar1, $scalar2,
$scalar3...);"
AV* av_make(SSize_t size, SV **strp)
av_pop Removes one SV from the end of the array, reducing its size by
one and returning the SV (transferring control of one reference
count) to the caller. Returns &PL_sv_undef if the array is
empty.
Perl equivalent: "pop(@myarray);"
SV* av_pop(AV *av)
av_push Pushes an SV (transferring control of one reference count) onto
the end of the array. The array will grow automatically to
accommodate the addition.
Perl equivalent: "push @myarray, $elem;".
void av_push(AV *av, SV *val)
av_shift
Removes one SV from the start of the array, reducing its size
by one and returning the SV (transferring control of one
reference count) to the caller. Returns &PL_sv_undef if the
array is empty.
Perl equivalent: "shift(@myarray);"
SV* av_shift(AV *av)
av_store
Stores an SV in an array. The array index is specified as
"key". The return value will be "NULL" if the operation failed
or if the value did not need to be actually stored within the
array (as in the case of tied arrays). Otherwise, it can be
dereferenced to get the "SV*" that was stored there (= "val")).
Note that the caller is responsible for suitably incrementing
the reference count of "val" before the call, and decrementing
it if the function returned "NULL".
Approximate Perl equivalent: "$myarray[$key] = $val;".
See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in
perlguts for more information on how to use this function on
tied arrays.
SV** av_store(AV *av, SSize_t key, SV *val)
av_tindex
Same as "av_top_index()".
int av_tindex(AV* av)
av_top_index
Returns the highest index in the array. The number of elements
in the array is "av_top_index(av)+1". Returns -1 if the
array is empty.
The Perl equivalent for this is $#myarray.
(A slightly shorter form is "av_tindex".)
SSize_t av_top_index(AV *av)
av_undef
Undefines the array. The XS equivalent of "undef(@array)".
As well as freeing all the elements of the array (like
"av_clear()"), this also frees the memory used by the av to
store its list of scalars.
See "av_clear" for a note about the array possibly being
invalid on return.
void av_undef(AV *av)
av_unshift
Unshift the given number of "undef" values onto the beginning
of the array. The array will grow automatically to accommodate
the addition. You must then use "av_store" to assign values to
these new elements.
Perl equivalent: "unshift@myarray,((undef)x$n);"
void av_unshift(AV *av, SSize_t num)
get_av Returns the AV of the specified Perl global or package array
with the given name (so it won't work on lexical variables).
"flags" are passed to "gv_fetchpv". If "GV_ADD" is set and the
Perl variable does not exist then it will be created. If
"flags" is zero and the variable does not exist then NULL is
returned.
Perl equivalent: "@{"$name"}".
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
AV* get_av(const char *name, I32 flags)
newAV Creates a new AV. The reference count is set to 1.
Perl equivalent: "my @array;".
AV* newAV()
sortsv Sort an array. Here is an example:
sortsv(AvARRAY(av), av_top_index(av)+1, Perl_sv_cmp_locale);
Currently this always uses mergesort. See "sortsv_flags" for a
more flexible routine.
void sortsv(SV** array, size_t num_elts,
SVCOMPARE_t cmp)
sortsv_flags
Sort an array, with various options.
void sortsv_flags(SV** array, size_t num_elts,
SVCOMPARE_t cmp, U32 flags)
Callback Functions
call_argv
Performs a callback to the specified named and package-scoped
Perl subroutine with "argv" (a "NULL"-terminated array of
strings) as arguments. See perlcall.
Approximate Perl equivalent: "&{"$sub_name"}(@$argv)".
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
I32 call_argv(const char* sub_name, I32 flags,
char** argv)
call_method
Performs a callback to the specified Perl method. The blessed
object must be on the stack. See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
I32 call_method(const char* methname, I32 flags)
call_pv Performs a callback to the specified Perl sub. See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
I32 call_pv(const char* sub_name, I32 flags)
call_sv Performs a callback to the Perl sub specified by the SV.
If neither the "G_METHOD" nor "G_METHOD_NAMED" flag is
supplied, the SV may be any of a CV, a GV, a reference to a CV,
a reference to a GV or "SvPV(sv)" will be used as the name of
the sub to call.
If the "G_METHOD" flag is supplied, the SV may be a reference
to a CV or "SvPV(sv)" will be used as the name of the method to
call.
If the "G_METHOD_NAMED" flag is supplied, "SvPV(sv)" will be
used as the name of the method to call.
Some other values are treated specially for internal use and
should not be depended on.
See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
I32 call_sv(SV* sv, VOL I32 flags)
ENTER Opening bracket on a callback. See "LEAVE" and perlcall.
ENTER;
eval_pv Tells Perl to "eval" the given string in scalar context and
return an SV* result.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
SV* eval_pv(const char* p, I32 croak_on_error)
eval_sv Tells Perl to "eval" the string in the SV. It supports the
same flags as "call_sv", with the obvious exception of
"G_EVAL". See perlcall.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
I32 eval_sv(SV* sv, I32 flags)
FREETMPS
Closing bracket for temporaries on a callback. See "SAVETMPS"
and perlcall.
FREETMPS;
LEAVE Closing bracket on a callback. See "ENTER" and perlcall.
LEAVE;
SAVETMPS
Opening bracket for temporaries on a callback. See "FREETMPS"
and perlcall.
SAVETMPS;
Character case changing
toFOLD Converts the specified character to foldcase. If the input is
anything but an ASCII uppercase character, that input character
itself is returned. Variant "toFOLD_A" is equivalent. (There
is no equivalent "to_FOLD_L1" for the full Latin1 range, as the
full generality of "toFOLD_uvchr" is needed there.)
U8 toFOLD(U8 ch)
toFOLD_utf8
Converts the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its foldcase
version, and stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in
bytes in "lenp". Note that the buffer pointed to by "s" needs
to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the foldcase
version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the foldcased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
The input character at "p" is assumed to be well-formed.
UV toFOLD_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toFOLD_uvchr
Converts the code point "cp" to its foldcase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in bytes in "lenp".
The code point is interpreted as native if less than 256;
otherwise as Unicode. Note that the buffer pointed to by "s"
needs to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the
foldcase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the foldcased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
UV toFOLD_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toLOWER Converts the specified character to lowercase. If the input is
anything but an ASCII uppercase character, that input character
itself is returned. Variant "toLOWER_A" is equivalent.
U8 toLOWER(U8 ch)
toLOWER_L1
Converts the specified Latin1 character to lowercase. The
results are undefined if the input doesn't fit in a byte.
U8 toLOWER_L1(U8 ch)
toLOWER_LC
Converts the specified character to lowercase using the current
locale's rules, if possible; otherwise returns the input
character itself.
U8 toLOWER_LC(U8 ch)
toLOWER_utf8
Converts the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its lowercase
version, and stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in
bytes in "lenp". Note that the buffer pointed to by "s" needs
to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the lowercase
version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the lowercased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
The input character at "p" is assumed to be well-formed.
UV toLOWER_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toLOWER_uvchr
Converts the code point "cp" to its lowercase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in bytes in "lenp".
The code point is interpreted as native if less than 256;
otherwise as Unicode. Note that the buffer pointed to by "s"
needs to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the
lowercase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the lowercased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
UV toLOWER_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toTITLE Converts the specified character to titlecase. If the input is
anything but an ASCII lowercase character, that input character
itself is returned. Variant "toTITLE_A" is equivalent. (There
is no "toTITLE_L1" for the full Latin1 range, as the full
generality of "toTITLE_uvchr" is needed there. Titlecase is
not a concept used in locale handling, so there is no
functionality for that.)
U8 toTITLE(U8 ch)
toTITLE_utf8
Converts the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its titlecase
version, and stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in
bytes in "lenp". Note that the buffer pointed to by "s" needs
to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the titlecase
version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the titlecased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
The input character at "p" is assumed to be well-formed.
UV toTITLE_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toTITLE_uvchr
Converts the code point "cp" to its titlecase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in bytes in "lenp".
The code point is interpreted as native if less than 256;
otherwise as Unicode. Note that the buffer pointed to by "s"
needs to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the
titlecase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the titlecased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
UV toTITLE_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toUPPER Converts the specified character to uppercase. If the input is
anything but an ASCII lowercase character, that input character
itself is returned. Variant "toUPPER_A" is equivalent.
U8 toUPPER(U8 ch)
toUPPER_utf8
Converts the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its uppercase
version, and stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in
bytes in "lenp". Note that the buffer pointed to by "s" needs
to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the uppercase
version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the uppercased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
The input character at "p" is assumed to be well-formed.
UV toUPPER_utf8(U8* p, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
toUPPER_uvchr
Converts the code point "cp" to its uppercase version, and
stores that in UTF-8 in "s", and its length in bytes in "lenp".
The code point is interpreted as native if less than 256;
otherwise as Unicode. Note that the buffer pointed to by "s"
needs to be at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1" bytes since the
uppercase version may be longer than the original character.
The first code point of the uppercased version is returned (but
note, as explained just above, that there may be more.)
UV toUPPER_uvchr(UV cp, U8* s, STRLEN* lenp)
Character classification
This section is about functions (really macros) that classify
characters into types, such as punctuation versus alphabetic, etc.
Most of these are analogous to regular expression character classes.
(See "POSIX Character Classes" in perlrecharclass.) There are several
variants for each class. (Not all macros have all variants; each item
below lists the ones valid for it.) None are affected by "use bytes",
and only the ones with "LC" in the name are affected by the current
locale.
The base function, e.g., "isALPHA()", takes an octet (either a "char"
or a "U8") as input and returns a boolean as to whether or not the
character represented by that octet is (or on non-ASCII platforms,
corresponds to) an ASCII character in the named class based on
platform, Unicode, and Perl rules. If the input is a number that
doesn't fit in an octet, FALSE is returned.
Variant "isFOO_A" (e.g., "isALPHA_A()") is identical to the base
function with no suffix "_A".
Variant "isFOO_L1" imposes the Latin-1 (or EBCDIC equivlalent)
character set onto the platform. That is, the code points that are
ASCII are unaffected, since ASCII is a subset of Latin-1. But the non-
ASCII code points are treated as if they are Latin-1 characters. For
example, "isWORDCHAR_L1()" will return true when called with the code
point 0xDF, which is a word character in both ASCII and EBCDIC (though
it represents different characters in each).
Variant "isFOO_uvchr" is like the "isFOO_L1" variant, but accepts any
UV code point as input. If the code point is larger than 255, Unicode
rules are used to determine if it is in the character class. For
example, "isWORDCHAR_uvchr(0x100)" returns TRUE, since 0x100 is LATIN
CAPITAL LETTER A WITH MACRON in Unicode, and is a word character.
Variant "isFOO_utf8" is like "isFOO_uvchr", but the input is a pointer
to a (known to be well-formed) UTF-8 encoded string ("U8*" or "char*",
and possibly containing embedded "NUL" characters). The classification
of just the first (possibly multi-byte) character in the string is
tested.
Variant "isFOO_LC" is like the "isFOO_A" and "isFOO_L1" variants, but
the result is based on the current locale, which is what "LC" in the
name stands for. If Perl can determine that the current locale is a
UTF-8 locale, it uses the published Unicode rules; otherwise, it uses
the C library function that gives the named classification. For
example, "isDIGIT_LC()" when not in a UTF-8 locale returns the result
of calling "isdigit()". FALSE is always returned if the input won't
fit into an octet. On some platforms where the C library function is
known to be defective, Perl changes its result to follow the POSIX
standard's rules.
Variant "isFOO_LC_uvchr" is like "isFOO_LC", but is defined on any UV.
It returns the same as "isFOO_LC" for input code points less than 256,
and returns the hard-coded, not-affected-by-locale, Unicode results for
larger ones.
Variant "isFOO_LC_utf8" is like "isFOO_LC_uvchr", but the input is a
pointer to a (known to be well-formed) UTF-8 encoded string ("U8*" or
"char*", and possibly containing embedded "NUL" characters). The
classification of just the first (possibly multi-byte) character in the
string is tested.
isALPHA Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
an alphabetic character, analogous to "m/[[:alpha:]]/". See
the top of this section for an explanation of variants
"isALPHA_A", "isALPHA_L1", "isALPHA_uvchr", "isALPHA_utf8",
"isALPHA_LC", "isALPHA_LC_uvchr", and "isALPHA_LC_utf8".
bool isALPHA(char ch)
isALPHANUMERIC
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a either an alphabetic character or decimal digit, analogous to
"m/[[:alnum:]]/". See the top of this section for an
explanation of variants "isALPHANUMERIC_A",
"isALPHANUMERIC_L1", "isALPHANUMERIC_uvchr",
"isALPHANUMERIC_utf8", "isALPHANUMERIC_LC",
"isALPHANUMERIC_LC_uvchr", and "isALPHANUMERIC_LC_utf8".
bool isALPHANUMERIC(char ch)
isASCII Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
one of the 128 characters in the ASCII character set, analogous
to "m/[[:ascii:]]/". On non-ASCII platforms, it returns TRUE
iff this character corresponds to an ASCII character. Variants
"isASCII_A()" and "isASCII_L1()" are identical to "isASCII()".
See the top of this section for an explanation of variants
"isASCII_uvchr", "isASCII_utf8", "isASCII_LC",
"isASCII_LC_uvchr", and "isASCII_LC_utf8". Note, however, that
some platforms do not have the C library routine "isascii()".
In these cases, the variants whose names contain "LC" are the
same as the corresponding ones without.
Also note, that because all ASCII characters are UTF-8
invariant (meaning they have the exact same representation
(always a single byte) whether encoded in UTF-8 or not),
"isASCII" will give the correct results when called with any
byte in any string encoded or not in UTF-8. And similarly
"isASCII_utf8" will work properly on any string encoded or not
in UTF-8.
bool isASCII(char ch)
isBLANK Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a character considered to be a blank, analogous to
"m/[[:blank:]]/". See the top of this section for an
explanation of variants "isBLANK_A", "isBLANK_L1",
"isBLANK_uvchr", "isBLANK_utf8", "isBLANK_LC",
"isBLANK_LC_uvchr", and "isBLANK_LC_utf8". Note, however, that
some platforms do not have the C library routine "isblank()".
In these cases, the variants whose names contain "LC" are the
same as the corresponding ones without.
bool isBLANK(char ch)
isCNTRL Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a control character, analogous to "m/[[:cntrl:]]/". See the
top of this section for an explanation of variants "isCNTRL_A",
"isCNTRL_L1", "isCNTRL_uvchr", "isCNTRL_utf8", "isCNTRL_LC",
"isCNTRL_LC_uvchr", and "isCNTRL_LC_utf8" On EBCDIC platforms,
you almost always want to use the "isCNTRL_L1" variant.
bool isCNTRL(char ch)
isDIGIT Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a digit, analogous to "m/[[:digit:]]/". Variants "isDIGIT_A"
and "isDIGIT_L1" are identical to "isDIGIT". See the top of
this section for an explanation of variants "isDIGIT_uvchr",
"isDIGIT_utf8", "isDIGIT_LC", "isDIGIT_LC_uvchr", and
"isDIGIT_LC_utf8".
bool isDIGIT(char ch)
isGRAPH Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a graphic character, analogous to "m/[[:graph:]]/". See the
top of this section for an explanation of variants "isGRAPH_A",
"isGRAPH_L1", "isGRAPH_uvchr", "isGRAPH_utf8", "isGRAPH_LC",
"isGRAPH_LC_uvchr", and "isGRAPH_LC_utf8".
bool isGRAPH(char ch)
isIDCONT
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character
can be the second or succeeding character of an identifier.
This is very close to, but not quite the same as the official
Unicode property "XID_Continue". The difference is that this
returns true only if the input character also matches
"isWORDCHAR". See the top of this section for an explanation
of variants "isIDCONT_A", "isIDCONT_L1", "isIDCONT_uvchr",
"isIDCONT_utf8", "isIDCONT_LC", "isIDCONT_LC_uvchr", and
"isIDCONT_LC_utf8".
bool isIDCONT(char ch)
isIDFIRST
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character
can be the first character of an identifier. This is very
close to, but not quite the same as the official Unicode
property "XID_Start". The difference is that this returns true
only if the input character also matches "isWORDCHAR". See the
top of this section for an explanation of variants
"isIDFIRST_A", "isIDFIRST_L1", "isIDFIRST_uvchr",
"isIDFIRST_utf8", "isIDFIRST_LC", "isIDFIRST_LC_uvchr", and
"isIDFIRST_LC_utf8".
bool isIDFIRST(char ch)
isLOWER Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a lowercase character, analogous to "m/[[:lower:]]/". See the
top of this section for an explanation of variants "isLOWER_A",
"isLOWER_L1", "isLOWER_uvchr", "isLOWER_utf8", "isLOWER_LC",
"isLOWER_LC_uvchr", and "isLOWER_LC_utf8".
bool isLOWER(char ch)
isOCTAL Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
an octal digit, [0-7]. The only two variants are "isOCTAL_A"
and "isOCTAL_L1"; each is identical to "isOCTAL".
bool isOCTAL(char ch)
isPRINT Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a printable character, analogous to "m/[[:print:]]/". See the
top of this section for an explanation of variants "isPRINT_A",
"isPRINT_L1", "isPRINT_uvchr", "isPRINT_utf8", "isPRINT_LC",
"isPRINT_LC_uvchr", and "isPRINT_LC_utf8".
bool isPRINT(char ch)
isPSXSPC
(short for Posix Space) Starting in 5.18, this is identical in
all its forms to the corresponding "isSPACE()" macros. The
locale forms of this macro are identical to their corresponding
"isSPACE()" forms in all Perl releases. In releases prior to
5.18, the non-locale forms differ from their "isSPACE()" forms
only in that the "isSPACE()" forms don't match a Vertical Tab,
and the "isPSXSPC()" forms do. Otherwise they are identical.
Thus this macro is analogous to what "m/[[:space:]]/" matches
in a regular expression. See the top of this section for an
explanation of variants "isPSXSPC_A", "isPSXSPC_L1",
"isPSXSPC_uvchr", "isPSXSPC_utf8", "isPSXSPC_LC",
"isPSXSPC_LC_uvchr", and "isPSXSPC_LC_utf8".
bool isPSXSPC(char ch)
isPUNCT Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a punctuation character, analogous to "m/[[:punct:]]/". Note
that the definition of what is punctuation isn't as
straightforward as one might desire. See "POSIX Character
Classes" in perlrecharclass for details. See the top of this
section for an explanation of variants "isPUNCT_A",
"isPUNCT_L1", "isPUNCT_uvchr", "isPUNCT_utf8", "isPUNCT_LC",
"isPUNCT_LC_uvchr", and "isPUNCT_LC_utf8".
bool isPUNCT(char ch)
isSPACE Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a whitespace character. This is analogous to what "m/\s/"
matches in a regular expression. Starting in Perl 5.18 this
also matches what "m/[[:space:]]/" does. Prior to 5.18, only
the locale forms of this macro (the ones with "LC" in their
names) matched precisely what "m/[[:space:]]/" does. In those
releases, the only difference, in the non-locale variants, was
that "isSPACE()" did not match a vertical tab. (See "isPSXSPC"
for a macro that matches a vertical tab in all releases.) See
the top of this section for an explanation of variants
"isSPACE_A", "isSPACE_L1", "isSPACE_uvchr", "isSPACE_utf8",
"isSPACE_LC", "isSPACE_LC_uvchr", and "isSPACE_LC_utf8".
bool isSPACE(char ch)
isUPPER Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
an uppercase character, analogous to "m/[[:upper:]]/". See the
top of this section for an explanation of variants "isUPPER_A",
"isUPPER_L1", "isUPPER_uvchr", "isUPPER_utf8", "isUPPER_LC",
"isUPPER_LC_uvchr", and "isUPPER_LC_utf8".
bool isUPPER(char ch)
isWORDCHAR
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a character that is a word character, analogous to what "m/\w/"
and "m/[[:word:]]/" match in a regular expression. A word
character is an alphabetic character, a decimal digit, a
connecting punctuation character (such as an underscore), or a
"mark" character that attaches to one of those (like some sort
of accent). "isALNUM()" is a synonym provided for backward
compatibility, even though a word character includes more than
the standard C language meaning of alphanumeric. See the top
of this section for an explanation of variants "isWORDCHAR_A",
"isWORDCHAR_L1", "isWORDCHAR_uvchr", and "isWORDCHAR_utf8".
"isWORDCHAR_LC", "isWORDCHAR_LC_uvchr", and
"isWORDCHAR_LC_utf8" are also as described there, but
additionally include the platform's native underscore.
bool isWORDCHAR(char ch)
isXDIGIT
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is
a hexadecimal digit. In the ASCII range these are
"[0-9A-Fa-f]". Variants "isXDIGIT_A()" and "isXDIGIT_L1()" are
identical to "isXDIGIT()". See the top of this section for an
explanation of variants "isXDIGIT_uvchr", "isXDIGIT_utf8",
"isXDIGIT_LC", "isXDIGIT_LC_uvchr", and "isXDIGIT_LC_utf8".
bool isXDIGIT(char ch)
Cloning an interpreter
perl_clone
Create and return a new interpreter by cloning the current one.
"perl_clone" takes these flags as parameters:
"CLONEf_COPY_STACKS" - is used to, well, copy the stacks also,
without it we only clone the data and zero the stacks, with it
we copy the stacks and the new perl interpreter is ready to run
at the exact same point as the previous one. The pseudo-fork
code uses "COPY_STACKS" while the threads->create doesn't.
"CLONEf_KEEP_PTR_TABLE" - "perl_clone" keeps a ptr_table with
the pointer of the old variable as a key and the new variable
as a value, this allows it to check if something has been
cloned and not clone it again but rather just use the value and
increase the refcount. If "KEEP_PTR_TABLE" is not set then
"perl_clone" will kill the ptr_table using the function
"ptr_table_free(PL_ptr_table); PL_ptr_table = NULL;", reason to
keep it around is if you want to dup some of your own variable
who are outside the graph perl scans, an example of this code
is in threads.xs create.
"CLONEf_CLONE_HOST" - This is a win32 thing, it is ignored on
unix, it tells perls win32host code (which is c++) to clone
itself, this is needed on win32 if you want to run two threads
at the same time, if you just want to do some stuff in a
separate perl interpreter and then throw it away and return to
the original one, you don't need to do anything.
PerlInterpreter* perl_clone(
PerlInterpreter *proto_perl,
UV flags
)
Compile-time scope hooks
BhkDISABLE
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Temporarily disable an entry in this BHK structure, by clearing
the appropriate flag. "which" is a preprocessor token
indicating which entry to disable.
void BhkDISABLE(BHK *hk, which)
BhkENABLE
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Re-enable an entry in this BHK structure, by setting the
appropriate flag. "which" is a preprocessor token indicating
which entry to enable. This will assert (under -DDEBUGGING) if
the entry doesn't contain a valid pointer.
void BhkENABLE(BHK *hk, which)
BhkENTRY_set
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Set an entry in the BHK structure, and set the flags to
indicate it is valid. "which" is a preprocessing token
indicating which entry to set. The type of "ptr" depends on
the entry.
void BhkENTRY_set(BHK *hk, which, void *ptr)
blockhook_register
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Register a set of hooks to be called when the Perl lexical
scope changes at compile time. See "Compile-time scope hooks"
in perlguts.
NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as
Perl_blockhook_register with an aTHX_ parameter.
void Perl_blockhook_register(pTHX_ BHK *hk)
COP Hint Hashes
cophh_2hv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Generates and returns a standard Perl hash representing the
full set of key/value pairs in the cop hints hash "cophh".
"flags" is currently unused and must be zero.
HV * cophh_2hv(const COPHH *cophh, U32 flags)
cophh_copy
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Make and return a complete copy of the cop hints hash "cophh".
COPHH * cophh_copy(COPHH *cophh)
cophh_delete_pv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_delete_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string
instead of a string/length pair.
COPHH * cophh_delete_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *key, U32 hash,
U32 flags)
cophh_delete_pvn
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Delete a key and its associated value from the cop hints hash
"cophh", and returns the modified hash. The returned hash
pointer is in general not the same as the hash pointer that was
passed in. The input hash is consumed by the function, and the
pointer to it must not be subsequently used. Use "cophh_copy"
if you need both hashes.
The key is specified by "keypv" and "keylen". If "flags" has
the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8" bit set, the key octets are interpreted as
UTF-8, otherwise they are interpreted as Latin-1. "hash" is a
precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been
precomputed.
COPHH * cophh_delete_pvn(COPHH *cophh,
const char *keypv,
STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
U32 flags)
cophh_delete_pvs
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_delete_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair, and no precomputed
hash.
COPHH * cophh_delete_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *key, U32 flags)
cophh_delete_sv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_delete_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a
string/length pair.
COPHH * cophh_delete_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
U32 hash, U32 flags)
cophh_fetch_pv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_fetch_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string
instead of a string/length pair.
SV * cophh_fetch_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *key, U32 hash,
U32 flags)
cophh_fetch_pvn
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Look up the entry in the cop hints hash "cophh" with the key
specified by "keypv" and "keylen". If "flags" has the
"COPHH_KEY_UTF8" bit set, the key octets are interpreted as
UTF-8, otherwise they are interpreted as Latin-1. "hash" is a
precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been
precomputed. Returns a mortal scalar copy of the value
associated with the key, or &PL_sv_placeholder if there is no
value associated with the key.
SV * cophh_fetch_pvn(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *keypv,
STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
U32 flags)
cophh_fetch_pvs
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_fetch_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair, and no precomputed
hash.
SV * cophh_fetch_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *key, U32 flags)
cophh_fetch_sv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_fetch_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a
string/length pair.
SV * cophh_fetch_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
U32 hash, U32 flags)
cophh_free
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Discard the cop hints hash "cophh", freeing all resources
associated with it.
void cophh_free(COPHH *cophh)
cophh_new_empty
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Generate and return a fresh cop hints hash containing no
entries.
COPHH * cophh_new_empty()
cophh_store_pv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_store_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string
instead of a string/length pair.
COPHH * cophh_store_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *key, U32 hash,
SV *value, U32 flags)
cophh_store_pvn
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Stores a value, associated with a key, in the cop hints hash
"cophh", and returns the modified hash. The returned hash
pointer is in general not the same as the hash pointer that was
passed in. The input hash is consumed by the function, and the
pointer to it must not be subsequently used. Use "cophh_copy"
if you need both hashes.
The key is specified by "keypv" and "keylen". If "flags" has
the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8" bit set, the key octets are interpreted as
UTF-8, otherwise they are interpreted as Latin-1. "hash" is a
precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been
precomputed.
"value" is the scalar value to store for this key. "value" is
copied by this function, which thus does not take ownership of
any reference to it, and later changes to the scalar will not
be reflected in the value visible in the cop hints hash.
Complex types of scalar will not be stored with referential
integrity, but will be coerced to strings.
COPHH * cophh_store_pvn(COPHH *cophh, const char *keypv,
STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
SV *value, U32 flags)
cophh_store_pvs
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_store_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair, and no precomputed
hash.
COPHH * cophh_store_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
const char *key, SV *value,
U32 flags)
cophh_store_sv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "cophh_store_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a
string/length pair.
COPHH * cophh_store_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
U32 hash, SV *value, U32 flags)
COP Hint Reading
cop_hints_2hv
Generates and returns a standard Perl hash representing the
full set of hint entries in the cop "cop". "flags" is
currently unused and must be zero.
HV * cop_hints_2hv(const COP *cop, U32 flags)
cop_hints_fetch_pv
Like "cop_hints_fetch_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string
instead of a string/length pair.
SV * cop_hints_fetch_pv(const COP *cop,
const char *key, U32 hash,
U32 flags)
cop_hints_fetch_pvn
Look up the hint entry in the cop "cop" with the key specified
by "keypv" and "keylen". If "flags" has the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8"
bit set, the key octets are interpreted as UTF-8, otherwise
they are interpreted as Latin-1. "hash" is a precomputed hash
of the key string, or zero if it has not been precomputed.
Returns a mortal scalar copy of the value associated with the
key, or &PL_sv_placeholder if there is no value associated with
the key.
SV * cop_hints_fetch_pvn(const COP *cop,
const char *keypv,
STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
U32 flags)
cop_hints_fetch_pvs
Like "cop_hints_fetch_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated
literal string instead of a string/length pair, and no
precomputed hash.
SV * cop_hints_fetch_pvs(const COP *cop,
const char *key, U32 flags)
cop_hints_fetch_sv
Like "cop_hints_fetch_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of
a string/length pair.
SV * cop_hints_fetch_sv(const COP *cop, SV *key,
U32 hash, U32 flags)
Custom Operators
custom_op_register
Register a custom op. See "Custom Operators" in perlguts.
NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as
Perl_custom_op_register with an aTHX_ parameter.
void Perl_custom_op_register(pTHX_
Perl_ppaddr_t ppaddr,
const XOP *xop)
custom_op_xop
Return the XOP structure for a given custom op. This macro
should be considered internal to "OP_NAME" and the other access
macros: use them instead. This macro does call a function.
Prior to 5.19.6, this was implemented as a function.
NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as
Perl_custom_op_xop with an aTHX_ parameter.
const XOP * Perl_custom_op_xop(pTHX_ const OP *o)
XopDISABLE
Temporarily disable a member of the XOP, by clearing the
appropriate flag.
void XopDISABLE(XOP *xop, which)
XopENABLE
Reenable a member of the XOP which has been disabled.
void XopENABLE(XOP *xop, which)
XopENTRY
Return a member of the XOP structure. "which" is a cpp token
indicating which entry to return. If the member is not set
this will return a default value. The return type depends on
"which". This macro evaluates its arguments more than once.
If you are using "Perl_custom_op_xop" to retreive a "XOP *"
from a "OP *", use the more efficient "XopENTRYCUSTOM" instead.
XopENTRY(XOP *xop, which)
XopENTRYCUSTOM
Exactly like "XopENTRY(XopENTRY(Perl_custom_op_xop(aTHX_ o),
which)" but more efficient. The "which" parameter is identical
to "XopENTRY".
XopENTRYCUSTOM(const OP *o, which)
XopENTRY_set
Set a member of the XOP structure. "which" is a cpp token
indicating which entry to set. See "Custom Operators" in
perlguts for details about the available members and how they
are used. This macro evaluates its argument more than once.
void XopENTRY_set(XOP *xop, which, value)
XopFLAGS
Return the XOP's flags.
U32 XopFLAGS(XOP *xop)
CV Manipulation Functions
This section documents functions to manipulate CVs which are code-
values, or subroutines. For more information, see perlguts.
caller_cx
The XSUB-writer's equivalent of caller(). The returned
"PERL_CONTEXT" structure can be interrogated to find all the
information returned to Perl by "caller". Note that XSUBs
don't get a stack frame, so "caller_cx(0, NULL)" will return
information for the immediately-surrounding Perl code.
This function skips over the automatic calls to &DB::sub made
on the behalf of the debugger. If the stack frame requested
was a sub called by "DB::sub", the return value will be the
frame for the call to "DB::sub", since that has the correct
line number/etc. for the call site. If dbcxp is non-"NULL", it
will be set to a pointer to the frame for the sub call itself.
const PERL_CONTEXT * caller_cx(
I32 level,
const PERL_CONTEXT **dbcxp
)
CvSTASH Returns the stash of the CV. A stash is the symbol table hash,
containing the package-scoped variables in the package where
the subroutine was defined. For more information, see
perlguts.
This also has a special use with XS AUTOLOAD subs. See
"Autoloading with XSUBs" in perlguts.
HV* CvSTASH(CV* cv)
find_runcv
Locate the CV corresponding to the currently executing sub or
eval. If "db_seqp" is non_null, skip CVs that are in the DB
package and populate *db_seqp with the cop sequence number at
the point that the DB:: code was entered. (This allows
debuggers to eval in the scope of the breakpoint rather than in
the scope of the debugger itself.)
CV* find_runcv(U32 *db_seqp)
get_cv Uses "strlen" to get the length of "name", then calls
"get_cvn_flags".
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
CV* get_cv(const char* name, I32 flags)
get_cvn_flags
Returns the CV of the specified Perl subroutine. "flags" are
passed to "gv_fetchpvn_flags". If "GV_ADD" is set and the Perl
subroutine does not exist then it will be declared (which has
the same effect as saying "sub name;"). If "GV_ADD" is not set
and the subroutine does not exist then NULL is returned.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
CV* get_cvn_flags(const char* name, STRLEN len,
I32 flags)
"xsubpp" variables and internal functions
ax Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate the stack base
offset, used by the "ST", "XSprePUSH" and "XSRETURN" macros.
The "dMARK" macro must be called prior to setup the "MARK"
variable.
I32 ax
CLASS Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate the class name
for a C++ XS constructor. This is always a "char*". See
"THIS".
char* CLASS
dAX Sets up the "ax" variable. This is usually handled
automatically by "xsubpp" by calling "dXSARGS".
dAX;
dAXMARK Sets up the "ax" variable and stack marker variable "mark".
This is usually handled automatically by "xsubpp" by calling
"dXSARGS".
dAXMARK;
dITEMS Sets up the "items" variable. This is usually handled
automatically by "xsubpp" by calling "dXSARGS".
dITEMS;
dUNDERBAR
Sets up any variable needed by the "UNDERBAR" macro. It used
to define "padoff_du", but it is currently a noop. However, it
is strongly advised to still use it for ensuring past and
future compatibility.
dUNDERBAR;
dXSARGS Sets up stack and mark pointers for an XSUB, calling "dSP" and
"dMARK". Sets up the "ax" and "items" variables by calling
"dAX" and "dITEMS". This is usually handled automatically by
"xsubpp".
dXSARGS;
dXSI32 Sets up the "ix" variable for an XSUB which has aliases. This
is usually handled automatically by "xsubpp".
dXSI32;
items Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate the number of
items on the stack. See "Variable-length Parameter Lists" in
perlxs.
I32 items
ix Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate which of an
XSUB's aliases was used to invoke it. See "The ALIAS: Keyword"
in perlxs.
I32 ix
RETVAL Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to hold the return value
for an XSUB. This is always the proper type for the XSUB. See
"The RETVAL Variable" in perlxs.
(whatever) RETVAL
ST Used to access elements on the XSUB's stack.
SV* ST(int ix)
THIS Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to designate the object in
a C++ XSUB. This is always the proper type for the C++ object.
See "CLASS" and "Using XS With C++" in perlxs.
(whatever) THIS
UNDERBAR
The SV* corresponding to the $_ variable. Works even if there
is a lexical $_ in scope.
XS Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list. This is
handled by "xsubpp". It is the same as using the more explicit
"XS_EXTERNAL" macro.
XS_EXTERNAL
Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list explicitly
exporting the symbols.
XS_INTERNAL
Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list without
exporting the symbols. This is handled by "xsubpp" and
generally preferable over exporting the XSUB symbols
unnecessarily.
Debugging Utilities
dump_all
Dumps the entire optree of the current program starting at
"PL_main_root" to "STDERR". Also dumps the optrees for all
visible subroutines in "PL_defstash".
void dump_all()
dump_packsubs
Dumps the optrees for all visible subroutines in "stash".
void dump_packsubs(const HV* stash)
op_dump Dumps the optree starting at OP "o" to "STDERR".
void op_dump(const OP *o)
sv_dump Dumps the contents of an SV to the "STDERR" filehandle.
For an example of its output, see Devel::Peek.
void sv_dump(SV* sv)
Display and Dump functions
pv_display
Similar to
pv_escape(dsv,pv,cur,pvlim,PERL_PV_ESCAPE_QUOTE);
except that an additional "\0" will be appended to the string
when len > cur and pv[cur] is "\0".
Note that the final string may be up to 7 chars longer than
pvlim.
char* pv_display(SV *dsv, const char *pv, STRLEN cur,
STRLEN len, STRLEN pvlim)
pv_escape
Escapes at most the first "count" chars of "pv" and puts the
results into "dsv" such that the size of the escaped string
will not exceed "max" chars and will not contain any incomplete
escape sequences. The number of bytes escaped will be returned
in the "STRLEN *escaped" parameter if it is not null. When the
"dsv" parameter is null no escaping actually occurs, but the
number of bytes that would be escaped were it not null will be
calculated.
If flags contains "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_QUOTE" then any double quotes
in the string will also be escaped.
Normally the SV will be cleared before the escaped string is
prepared, but when "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NOCLEAR" is set this will
not occur.
If "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_UNI" is set then the input string is treated
as UTF-8 if "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_UNI_DETECT" is set then the input
string is scanned using "is_utf8_string()" to determine if it
is UTF-8.
If "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_ALL" is set then all input chars will be
output using "\x01F1" style escapes, otherwise if
"PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NONASCII" is set, only non-ASCII chars will be
escaped using this style; otherwise, only chars above 255 will
be so escaped; other non printable chars will use octal or
common escaped patterns like "\n". Otherwise, if
"PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NOBACKSLASH" then all chars below 255 will be
treated as printable and will be output as literals.
If "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_FIRSTCHAR" is set then only the first char
of the string will be escaped, regardless of max. If the
output is to be in hex, then it will be returned as a plain hex
sequence. Thus the output will either be a single char, an
octal escape sequence, a special escape like "\n" or a hex
value.
If "PERL_PV_ESCAPE_RE" is set then the escape char used will be
a "%" and not a "\\". This is because regexes very often
contain backslashed sequences, whereas "%" is not a
particularly common character in patterns.
Returns a pointer to the escaped text as held by "dsv".
char* pv_escape(SV *dsv, char const * const str,
const STRLEN count, const STRLEN max,
STRLEN * const escaped,
const U32 flags)
pv_pretty
Converts a string into something presentable, handling escaping
via "pv_escape()" and supporting quoting and ellipses.
If the "PERL_PV_PRETTY_QUOTE" flag is set then the result will
be double quoted with any double quotes in the string escaped.
Otherwise if the "PERL_PV_PRETTY_LTGT" flag is set then the
result be wrapped in angle brackets.
If the "PERL_PV_PRETTY_ELLIPSES" flag is set and not all
characters in string were output then an ellipsis "..." will be
appended to the string. Note that this happens AFTER it has
been quoted.
If "start_color" is non-null then it will be inserted after the
opening quote (if there is one) but before the escaped text.
If "end_color" is non-null then it will be inserted after the
escaped text but before any quotes or ellipses.
Returns a pointer to the prettified text as held by "dsv".
char* pv_pretty(SV *dsv, char const * const str,
const STRLEN count, const STRLEN max,
char const * const start_color,
char const * const end_color,
const U32 flags)
Embedding Functions
cv_clone
Clone a CV, making a lexical closure. "proto" supplies the
prototype of the function: its code, pad structure, and other
attributes. The prototype is combined with a capture of outer
lexicals to which the code refers, which are taken from the
currently-executing instance of the immediately surrounding
code.
CV * cv_clone(CV *proto)
cv_name Returns an SV containing the name of the CV, mainly for use in
error reporting. The CV may actually be a GV instead, in which
case the returned SV holds the GV's name. Anything other than
a GV or CV is treated as a string already holding the sub name,
but this could change in the future.
An SV may be passed as a second argument. If so, the name will
be assigned to it and it will be returned. Otherwise the
returned SV will be a new mortal.
If "flags" has the "CV_NAME_NOTQUAL" bit set, then the package
name will not be included. If the first argument is neither a
CV nor a GV, this flag is ignored (subject to change).
SV * cv_name(CV *cv, SV *sv, U32 flags)
cv_undef
Clear out all the active components of a CV. This can happen
either by an explicit "undef &foo", or by the reference count
going to zero. In the former case, we keep the "CvOUTSIDE"
pointer, so that any anonymous children can still follow the
full lexical scope chain.
void cv_undef(CV* cv)
find_rundefsv
Returns the global variable $_.
SV * find_rundefsv()
find_rundefsvoffset
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Until the lexical $_ feature was removed, this function would
find the position of the lexical $_ in the pad of the
currently-executing function and returns the offset in the
current pad, or "NOT_IN_PAD".
Now it always returns "NOT_IN_PAD".
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
PADOFFSET find_rundefsvoffset()
intro_my
"Introduce" "my" variables to visible status. This is called
during parsing at the end of each statement to make lexical
variables visible to subsequent statements.
U32 intro_my()
load_module
Loads the module whose name is pointed to by the string part of
name. Note that the actual module name, not its filename,
should be given. Eg, "Foo::Bar" instead of "Foo/Bar.pm".
flags can be any of "PERL_LOADMOD_DENY",
"PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT", or "PERL_LOADMOD_IMPORT_OPS" (or 0 for
no flags). ver, if specified and not NULL, provides version
semantics similar to "use Foo::Bar VERSION". The optional
trailing SV* arguments can be used to specify arguments to the
module's "import()" method, similar to "use Foo::Bar VERSION
LIST". They must be terminated with a final "NULL" pointer.
Note that this list can only be omitted when the
"PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT" flag has been used. Otherwise at least
a single "NULL" pointer to designate the default import list is
required.
The reference count for each specified "SV*" parameter is
decremented.
void load_module(U32 flags, SV* name, SV* ver, ...)
newPADNAMELIST
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Creates a new pad name list. "max" is the highest index for
which space is allocated.
PADNAMELIST * newPADNAMELIST(size_t max)
newPADNAMEouter
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Constructs and returns a new pad name. Only use this function
for names that refer to outer lexicals. (See also
"newPADNAMEpvn".) "outer" is the outer pad name that this one
mirrors. The returned pad name has the "PADNAMEt_OUTER" flag
already set.
PADNAME * newPADNAMEouter(PADNAME *outer)
newPADNAMEpvn
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Constructs and returns a new pad name. "s" must be a UTF-8
string. Do not use this for pad names that point to outer
lexicals. See "newPADNAMEouter".
PADNAME * newPADNAMEpvn(const char *s, STRLEN len)
nothreadhook
Stub that provides thread hook for perl_destruct when there are
no threads.
int nothreadhook()
pad_add_anon
Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad (via
"pad_alloc") for an anonymous function that is lexically scoped
inside the currently-compiling function. The function "func"
is linked into the pad, and its "CvOUTSIDE" link to the outer
scope is weakened to avoid a reference loop.
One reference count is stolen, so you may need to do
"SvREFCNT_inc(func)".
"optype" should be an opcode indicating the type of operation
that the pad entry is to support. This doesn't affect
operational semantics, but is used for debugging.
PADOFFSET pad_add_anon(CV *func, I32 optype)
pad_add_name_pv
Exactly like "pad_add_name_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated
string instead of a string/length pair.
PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pv(const char *name, U32 flags,
HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
pad_add_name_pvn
Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad for a named
lexical variable. Stores the name and other metadata in the
name part of the pad, and makes preparations to manage the
variable's lexical scoping. Returns the offset of the
allocated pad slot.
"namepv"/"namelen" specify the variable's name, including
leading sigil. If "typestash" is non-null, the name is for a
typed lexical, and this identifies the type. If "ourstash" is
non-null, it's a lexical reference to a package variable, and
this identifies the package. The following flags can be OR'ed
together:
padadd_OUR redundantly specifies if it's a package var
padadd_STATE variable will retain value persistently
padadd_NO_DUP_CHECK skip check for lexical shadowing
PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pvn(const char *namepv,
STRLEN namelen, U32 flags,
HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
pad_add_name_sv
Exactly like "pad_add_name_pvn", but takes the name string in
the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
PADOFFSET pad_add_name_sv(SV *name, U32 flags,
HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
pad_alloc
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad, returning the
offset of the allocated pad slot. No name is initially
attached to the pad slot. "tmptype" is a set of flags
indicating the kind of pad entry required, which will be set in
the value SV for the allocated pad entry:
SVs_PADMY named lexical variable ("my", "our", "state")
SVs_PADTMP unnamed temporary store
SVf_READONLY constant shared between recursion levels
"SVf_READONLY" has been supported here only since perl 5.20.
To work with earlier versions as well, use
"SVf_READONLY|SVs_PADTMP". "SVf_READONLY" does not cause the
SV in the pad slot to be marked read-only, but simply tells
"pad_alloc" that it will be made read-only (by the caller), or
at least should be treated as such.
"optype" should be an opcode indicating the type of operation
that the pad entry is to support. This doesn't affect
operational semantics, but is used for debugging.
PADOFFSET pad_alloc(I32 optype, U32 tmptype)
pad_findmy_pv
Exactly like "pad_findmy_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated
string instead of a string/length pair.
PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pv(const char *name, U32 flags)
pad_findmy_pvn
Given the name of a lexical variable, find its position in the
currently-compiling pad. "namepv"/"namelen" specify the
variable's name, including leading sigil. "flags" is reserved
and must be zero. If it is not in the current pad but appears
in the pad of any lexically enclosing scope, then a pseudo-
entry for it is added in the current pad. Returns the offset
in the current pad, or "NOT_IN_PAD" if no such lexical is in
scope.
PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pvn(const char *namepv,
STRLEN namelen, U32 flags)
pad_findmy_sv
Exactly like "pad_findmy_pvn", but takes the name string in the
form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
PADOFFSET pad_findmy_sv(SV *name, U32 flags)
padnamelist_fetch
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Fetches the pad name from the given index.
PADNAME * padnamelist_fetch(PADNAMELIST *pnl,
SSize_t key)
padnamelist_store
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Stores the pad name (which may be null) at the given index,
freeing any existing pad name in that slot.
PADNAME ** padnamelist_store(PADNAMELIST *pnl,
SSize_t key, PADNAME *val)
pad_setsv
Set the value at offset "po" in the current (compiling or
executing) pad. Use the macro "PAD_SETSV()" rather than
calling this function directly.
void pad_setsv(PADOFFSET po, SV *sv)
pad_sv Get the value at offset "po" in the current (compiling or
executing) pad. Use macro "PAD_SV" instead of calling this
function directly.
SV * pad_sv(PADOFFSET po)
pad_tidy
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Tidy up a pad at the end of compilation of the code to which it
belongs. Jobs performed here are: remove most stuff from the
pads of anonsub prototypes; give it a @_; mark temporaries as
such. "type" indicates the kind of subroutine:
padtidy_SUB ordinary subroutine
padtidy_SUBCLONE prototype for lexical closure
padtidy_FORMAT format
void pad_tidy(padtidy_type type)
perl_alloc
Allocates a new Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
PerlInterpreter* perl_alloc()
perl_construct
Initializes a new Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
void perl_construct(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
perl_destruct
Shuts down a Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
int perl_destruct(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
perl_free
Releases a Perl interpreter. See perlembed.
void perl_free(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
perl_parse
Tells a Perl interpreter to parse a Perl script. See
perlembed.
int perl_parse(PerlInterpreter *my_perl,
XSINIT_t xsinit, int argc,
char** argv, char** env)
perl_run
Tells a Perl interpreter to run. See perlembed.
int perl_run(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)
require_pv
Tells Perl to "require" the file named by the string argument.
It is analogous to the Perl code "eval "require '$file'"".
It's even implemented that way; consider using load_module
instead.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
void require_pv(const char* pv)
Exception Handling (simple) Macros
dXCPT Set up necessary local variables for exception handling. See
"Exception Handling" in perlguts.
dXCPT;
XCPT_CATCH
Introduces a catch block. See "Exception Handling" in
perlguts.
XCPT_RETHROW
Rethrows a previously caught exception. See "Exception
Handling" in perlguts.
XCPT_RETHROW;
XCPT_TRY_END
Ends a try block. See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.
XCPT_TRY_START
Starts a try block. See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.
Functions in file scope.c
save_gp Saves the current GP of gv on the save stack to be restored on
scope exit.
If empty is true, replace the GP with a new GP.
If empty is false, mark gv with GVf_INTRO so the next reference
assigned is localized, which is how " local *foo = $someref; "
works.
void save_gp(GV* gv, I32 empty)
Functions in file vutil.c
new_version
Returns a new version object based on the passed in SV:
SV *sv = new_version(SV *ver);
Does not alter the passed in ver SV. See "upg_version" if you
want to upgrade the SV.
SV* new_version(SV *ver)
prescan_version
Validate that a given string can be parsed as a version object,
but doesn't actually perform the parsing. Can use either
strict or lax validation rules. Can optionally set a number of
hint variables to save the parsing code some time when
tokenizing.
const char* prescan_version(const char *s, bool strict,
const char** errstr,
bool *sqv,
int *ssaw_decimal,
int *swidth, bool *salpha)
scan_version
Returns a pointer to the next character after the parsed
version string, as well as upgrading the passed in SV to an RV.
Function must be called with an already existing SV like
sv = newSV(0);
s = scan_version(s, SV *sv, bool qv);
Performs some preprocessing to the string to ensure that it has
the correct characteristics of a version. Flags the object if
it contains an underscore (which denotes this is an alpha
version). The boolean qv denotes that the version should be
interpreted as if it had multiple decimals, even if it doesn't.
const char* scan_version(const char *s, SV *rv, bool qv)
upg_version
In-place upgrade of the supplied SV to a version object.
SV *sv = upg_version(SV *sv, bool qv);
Returns a pointer to the upgraded SV. Set the boolean qv if
you want to force this SV to be interpreted as an "extended"
version.
SV* upg_version(SV *ver, bool qv)
vcmp Version object aware cmp. Both operands must already have been
converted into version objects.
int vcmp(SV *lhv, SV *rhv)
vnormal Accepts a version object and returns the normalized string
representation. Call like:
sv = vnormal(rv);
NOTE: you can pass either the object directly or the SV
contained within the RV.
The SV returned has a refcount of 1.
SV* vnormal(SV *vs)
vnumify Accepts a version object and returns the normalized floating
point representation. Call like:
sv = vnumify(rv);
NOTE: you can pass either the object directly or the SV
contained within the RV.
The SV returned has a refcount of 1.
SV* vnumify(SV *vs)
vstringify
In order to maintain maximum compatibility with earlier
versions of Perl, this function will return either the floating
point notation or the multiple dotted notation, depending on
whether the original version contained 1 or more dots,
respectively.
The SV returned has a refcount of 1.
SV* vstringify(SV *vs)
vverify Validates that the SV contains valid internal structure for a
version object. It may be passed either the version object
(RV) or the hash itself (HV). If the structure is valid, it
returns the HV. If the structure is invalid, it returns NULL.
SV *hv = vverify(sv);
Note that it only confirms the bare minimum structure (so as
not to get confused by derived classes which may contain
additional hash entries):
SV* vverify(SV *vs)
"Gimme" Values
G_ARRAY Used to indicate list context. See "GIMME_V", "GIMME" and
perlcall.
G_DISCARD
Indicates that arguments returned from a callback should be
discarded. See perlcall.
G_EVAL Used to force a Perl "eval" wrapper around a callback. See
perlcall.
GIMME A backward-compatible version of "GIMME_V" which can only
return "G_SCALAR" or "G_ARRAY"; in a void context, it returns
"G_SCALAR". Deprecated. Use "GIMME_V" instead.
U32 GIMME
GIMME_V The XSUB-writer's equivalent to Perl's "wantarray". Returns
"G_VOID", "G_SCALAR" or "G_ARRAY" for void, scalar or list
context, respectively. See perlcall for a usage example.
U32 GIMME_V
G_NOARGS
Indicates that no arguments are being sent to a callback. See
perlcall.
G_SCALAR
Used to indicate scalar context. See "GIMME_V", "GIMME", and
perlcall.
G_VOID Used to indicate void context. See "GIMME_V" and perlcall.
Global Variables
These variables are global to an entire process. They are shared
between all interpreters and all threads in a process. Any variables
not documented here may be changed or removed without notice, so don't
use them! If you feel you really do need to use an unlisted variable,
first send email to perl5-porters@perl.org
<mailto:perl5-porters@perl.org>. It may be that someone there will
point out a way to accomplish what you need without using an internal
variable. But if not, you should get a go-ahead to document and then
use the variable.
PL_check
Array, indexed by opcode, of functions that will be called for
the "check" phase of optree building during compilation of Perl
code. For most (but not all) types of op, once the op has been
initially built and populated with child ops it will be
filtered through the check function referenced by the
appropriate element of this array. The new op is passed in as
the sole argument to the check function, and the check function
returns the completed op. The check function may (as the name
suggests) check the op for validity and signal errors. It may
also initialise or modify parts of the ops, or perform more
radical surgery such as adding or removing child ops, or even
throw the op away and return a different op in its place.
This array of function pointers is a convenient place to hook
into the compilation process. An XS module can put its own
custom check function in place of any of the standard ones, to
influence the compilation of a particular type of op. However,
a custom check function must never fully replace a standard
check function (or even a custom check function from another
module). A module modifying checking must instead wrap the
preexisting check function. A custom check function must be
selective about when to apply its custom behaviour. In the
usual case where it decides not to do anything special with an
op, it must chain the preexisting op function. Check functions
are thus linked in a chain, with the core's base checker at the
end.
For thread safety, modules should not write directly to this
array. Instead, use the function "wrap_op_checker".
PL_keyword_plugin
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Function pointer, pointing at a function used to handle
extended keywords. The function should be declared as
int keyword_plugin_function(pTHX_
char *keyword_ptr, STRLEN keyword_len,
OP **op_ptr)
The function is called from the tokeniser, whenever a possible
keyword is seen. "keyword_ptr" points at the word in the
parser's input buffer, and "keyword_len" gives its length; it
is not null-terminated. The function is expected to examine
the word, and possibly other state such as %^H, to decide
whether it wants to handle it as an extended keyword. If it
does not, the function should return "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_DECLINE",
and the normal parser process will continue.
If the function wants to handle the keyword, it first must
parse anything following the keyword that is part of the syntax
introduced by the keyword. See "Lexer interface" for details.
When a keyword is being handled, the plugin function must build
a tree of "OP" structures, representing the code that was
parsed. The root of the tree must be stored in *op_ptr. The
function then returns a constant indicating the syntactic role
of the construct that it has parsed: "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_STMT" if
it is a complete statement, or "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_EXPR" if it is
an expression. Note that a statement construct cannot be used
inside an expression (except via "do BLOCK" and similar), and
an expression is not a complete statement (it requires at least
a terminating semicolon).
When a keyword is handled, the plugin function may also have
(compile-time) side effects. It may modify "%^H", define
functions, and so on. Typically, if side effects are the main
purpose of a handler, it does not wish to generate any ops to
be included in the normal compilation. In this case it is
still required to supply an op tree, but it suffices to
generate a single null op.
That's how the *PL_keyword_plugin function needs to behave
overall. Conventionally, however, one does not completely
replace the existing handler function. Instead, take a copy of
"PL_keyword_plugin" before assigning your own function pointer
to it. Your handler function should look for keywords that it
is interested in and handle those. Where it is not interested,
it should call the saved plugin function, passing on the
arguments it received. Thus "PL_keyword_plugin" actually
points at a chain of handler functions, all of which have an
opportunity to handle keywords, and only the last function in
the chain (built into the Perl core) will normally return
"KEYWORD_PLUGIN_DECLINE".
GV Functions
A GV is a structure which corresponds to to a Perl typeglob, ie *foo.
It is a structure that holds a pointer to a scalar, an array, a hash
etc, corresponding to $foo, @foo, %foo.
GVs are usually found as values in stashes (symbol table hashes) where
Perl stores its global variables.
GvAV Return the AV from the GV.
AV* GvAV(GV* gv)
gv_const_sv
If "gv" is a typeglob whose subroutine entry is a constant sub
eligible for inlining, or "gv" is a placeholder reference that
would be promoted to such a typeglob, then returns the value
returned by the sub. Otherwise, returns "NULL".
SV* gv_const_sv(GV* gv)
GvCV Return the CV from the GV.
CV* GvCV(GV* gv)
gv_fetchmeth
Like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn", but lacks a flags parameter.
GV* gv_fetchmeth(HV* stash, const char* name,
STRLEN len, I32 level)
gv_fetchmethod_autoload
Returns the glob which contains the subroutine to call to
invoke the method on the "stash". In fact in the presence of
autoloading this may be the glob for "AUTOLOAD". In this case
the corresponding variable $AUTOLOAD is already setup.
The third parameter of "gv_fetchmethod_autoload" determines
whether AUTOLOAD lookup is performed if the given method is not
present: non-zero means yes, look for AUTOLOAD; zero means no,
don't look for AUTOLOAD. Calling "gv_fetchmethod" is
equivalent to calling "gv_fetchmethod_autoload" with a non-zero
"autoload" parameter.
These functions grant "SUPER" token as a prefix of the method
name. Note that if you want to keep the returned glob for a
long time, you need to check for it being "AUTOLOAD", since at
the later time the call may load a different subroutine due to
$AUTOLOAD changing its value. Use the glob created as a side
effect to do this.
These functions have the same side-effects as "gv_fetchmeth"
with "level==0". The warning against passing the GV returned
by "gv_fetchmeth" to "call_sv" applies equally to these
functions.
GV* gv_fetchmethod_autoload(HV* stash,
const char* name,
I32 autoload)
gv_fetchmeth_autoload
This is the old form of "gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload", which has
no flags parameter.
GV* gv_fetchmeth_autoload(HV* stash,
const char* name,
STRLEN len, I32 level)
gv_fetchmeth_pv
Exactly like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated
string instead of a string/length pair.
GV* gv_fetchmeth_pv(HV* stash, const char* name,
I32 level, U32 flags)
gv_fetchmeth_pvn
Returns the glob with the given "name" and a defined subroutine
or "NULL". The glob lives in the given "stash", or in the
stashes accessible via @ISA and "UNIVERSAL::".
The argument "level" should be either 0 or -1. If "level==0",
as a side-effect creates a glob with the given "name" in the
given "stash" which in the case of success contains an alias
for the subroutine, and sets up caching info for this glob.
The only significant values for "flags" are "GV_SUPER" and
"SVf_UTF8".
"GV_SUPER" indicates that we want to look up the method in the
superclasses of the "stash".
The GV returned from "gv_fetchmeth" may be a method cache
entry, which is not visible to Perl code. So when calling
"call_sv", you should not use the GV directly; instead, you
should use the method's CV, which can be obtained from the GV
with the "GvCV" macro.
GV* gv_fetchmeth_pvn(HV* stash, const char* name,
STRLEN len, I32 level,
U32 flags)
gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload
Same as "gv_fetchmeth_pvn()", but looks for autoloaded
subroutines too. Returns a glob for the subroutine.
For an autoloaded subroutine without a GV, will create a GV
even if "level < 0". For an autoloaded subroutine without a
stub, "GvCV()" of the result may be zero.
Currently, the only significant value for "flags" is
"SVf_UTF8".
GV* gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload(HV* stash,
const char* name,
STRLEN len, I32 level,
U32 flags)
gv_fetchmeth_pv_autoload
Exactly like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload", but takes a nul-
terminated string instead of a string/length pair.
GV* gv_fetchmeth_pv_autoload(HV* stash,
const char* name,
I32 level, U32 flags)
gv_fetchmeth_sv
Exactly like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn", but takes the name string in
the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
GV* gv_fetchmeth_sv(HV* stash, SV* namesv,
I32 level, U32 flags)
gv_fetchmeth_sv_autoload
Exactly like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload", but takes the name
string in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
GV* gv_fetchmeth_sv_autoload(HV* stash, SV* namesv,
I32 level, U32 flags)
GvHV Return the HV from the GV.
HV* GvHV(GV* gv)
gv_init The old form of "gv_init_pvn()". It does not work with UTF-8
strings, as it has no flags parameter. If the "multi"
parameter is set, the "GV_ADDMULTI" flag will be passed to
"gv_init_pvn()".
void gv_init(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
STRLEN len, int multi)
gv_init_pv
Same as "gv_init_pvn()", but takes a nul-terminated string for
the name instead of separate char * and length parameters.
void gv_init_pv(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
U32 flags)
gv_init_pvn
Converts a scalar into a typeglob. This is an incoercible
typeglob; assigning a reference to it will assign to one of its
slots, instead of overwriting it as happens with typeglobs
created by "SvSetSV". Converting any scalar that is "SvOK()"
may produce unpredictable results and is reserved for perl's
internal use.
"gv" is the scalar to be converted.
"stash" is the parent stash/package, if any.
"name" and "len" give the name. The name must be unqualified;
that is, it must not include the package name. If "gv" is a
stash element, it is the caller's responsibility to ensure that
the name passed to this function matches the name of the
element. If it does not match, perl's internal bookkeeping
will get out of sync.
"flags" can be set to "SVf_UTF8" if "name" is a UTF-8 string,
or the return value of SvUTF8(sv). It can also take the
"GV_ADDMULTI" flag, which means to pretend that the GV has been
seen before (i.e., suppress "Used once" warnings).
void gv_init_pvn(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
STRLEN len, U32 flags)
gv_init_sv
Same as "gv_init_pvn()", but takes an SV * for the name instead
of separate char * and length parameters. "flags" is currently
unused.
void gv_init_sv(GV* gv, HV* stash, SV* namesv,
U32 flags)
gv_stashpv
Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package. Uses
"strlen" to determine the length of "name", then calls
"gv_stashpvn()".
HV* gv_stashpv(const char* name, I32 flags)
gv_stashpvn
Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package. The
"namelen" parameter indicates the length of the "name", in
bytes. "flags" is passed to "gv_fetchpvn_flags()", so if set
to "GV_ADD" then the package will be created if it does not
already exist. If the package does not exist and "flags" is 0
(or any other setting that does not create packages) then
"NULL" is returned.
Flags may be one of:
GV_ADD
SVf_UTF8
GV_NOADD_NOINIT
GV_NOINIT
GV_NOEXPAND
GV_ADDMG
The most important of which are probably "GV_ADD" and
"SVf_UTF8".
Note, use of "gv_stashsv" instead of "gv_stashpvn" where
possible is strongly recommended for performance reasons.
HV* gv_stashpvn(const char* name, U32 namelen,
I32 flags)
gv_stashpvs
Like "gv_stashpvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
HV* gv_stashpvs(const char* name, I32 create)
gv_stashsv
Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package. See
"gv_stashpvn".
Note this interface is strongly preferred over "gv_stashpvn"
for performance reasons.
HV* gv_stashsv(SV* sv, I32 flags)
GvSV Return the SV from the GV.
SV* GvSV(GV* gv)
setdefout
Sets "PL_defoutgv", the default file handle for output, to the
passed in typeglob. As "PL_defoutgv" "owns" a reference on its
typeglob, the reference count of the passed in typeglob is
increased by one, and the reference count of the typeglob that
"PL_defoutgv" points to is decreased by one.
void setdefout(GV* gv)
Handy Values
Nullav Null AV pointer.
(deprecated - use "(AV *)NULL" instead)
Nullch Null character pointer. (No longer available when "PERL_CORE"
is defined.)
Nullcv Null CV pointer.
(deprecated - use "(CV *)NULL" instead)
Nullhv Null HV pointer.
(deprecated - use "(HV *)NULL" instead)
Nullsv Null SV pointer. (No longer available when "PERL_CORE" is
defined.)
Hash Manipulation Functions
A HV structure represents a Perl hash. It consists mainly of an array
of pointers, each of which points to a linked list of HE structures.
The array is indexed by the hash function of the key, so each linked
list represents all the hash entries with the same hash value. Each HE
contains a pointer to the actual value, plus a pointer to a HEK
structure which holds the key and hash value.
cop_fetch_label
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Returns the label attached to a cop. The flags pointer may be
set to "SVf_UTF8" or 0.
const char * cop_fetch_label(COP *const cop,
STRLEN *len, U32 *flags)
cop_store_label
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Save a label into a "cop_hints_hash". You need to set flags to
"SVf_UTF8" for a UTF-8 label.
void cop_store_label(COP *const cop,
const char *label, STRLEN len,
U32 flags)
get_hv Returns the HV of the specified Perl hash. "flags" are passed
to "gv_fetchpv". If "GV_ADD" is set and the Perl variable does
not exist then it will be created. If "flags" is zero and the
variable does not exist then "NULL" is returned.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
HV* get_hv(const char *name, I32 flags)
HEf_SVKEY
This flag, used in the length slot of hash entries and magic
structures, specifies the structure contains an "SV*" pointer
where a "char*" pointer is to be expected. (For information
only--not to be used).
HeHASH Returns the computed hash stored in the hash entry.
U32 HeHASH(HE* he)
HeKEY Returns the actual pointer stored in the key slot of the hash
entry. The pointer may be either "char*" or "SV*", depending
on the value of "HeKLEN()". Can be assigned to. The "HePV()"
or "HeSVKEY()" macros are usually preferable for finding the
value of a key.
void* HeKEY(HE* he)
HeKLEN If this is negative, and amounts to "HEf_SVKEY", it indicates
the entry holds an "SV*" key. Otherwise, holds the actual
length of the key. Can be assigned to. The "HePV()" macro is
usually preferable for finding key lengths.
STRLEN HeKLEN(HE* he)
HePV Returns the key slot of the hash entry as a "char*" value,
doing any necessary dereferencing of possibly "SV*" keys. The
length of the string is placed in "len" (this is a macro, so do
not use &len). If you do not care about what the length of the
key is, you may use the global variable "PL_na", though this is
rather less efficient than using a local variable. Remember
though, that hash keys in perl are free to contain embedded
nulls, so using "strlen()" or similar is not a good way to find
the length of hash keys. This is very similar to the "SvPV()"
macro described elsewhere in this document. See also "HeUTF8".
If you are using "HePV" to get values to pass to "newSVpvn()"
to create a new SV, you should consider using
"newSVhek(HeKEY_hek(he))" as it is more efficient.
char* HePV(HE* he, STRLEN len)
HeSVKEY Returns the key as an "SV*", or "NULL" if the hash entry does
not contain an "SV*" key.
SV* HeSVKEY(HE* he)
HeSVKEY_force
Returns the key as an "SV*". Will create and return a
temporary mortal "SV*" if the hash entry contains only a
"char*" key.
SV* HeSVKEY_force(HE* he)
HeSVKEY_set
Sets the key to a given "SV*", taking care to set the
appropriate flags to indicate the presence of an "SV*" key, and
returns the same "SV*".
SV* HeSVKEY_set(HE* he, SV* sv)
HeUTF8 Returns whether the "char *" value returned by "HePV" is
encoded in UTF-8, doing any necessary dereferencing of possibly
"SV*" keys. The value returned will be 0 or non-0, not
necessarily 1 (or even a value with any low bits set), so do
not blindly assign this to a "bool" variable, as "bool" may be
a typedef for "char".
U32 HeUTF8(HE* he)
HeVAL Returns the value slot (type "SV*") stored in the hash entry.
Can be assigned to.
SV *foo= HeVAL(hv);
HeVAL(hv)= sv;
SV* HeVAL(HE* he)
hv_assert
Check that a hash is in an internally consistent state.
void hv_assert(HV *hv)
hv_clear
Frees the all the elements of a hash, leaving it empty. The XS
equivalent of "%hash = ()". See also "hv_undef".
See "av_clear" for a note about the hash possibly being invalid
on return.
void hv_clear(HV *hv)
hv_clear_placeholders
Clears any placeholders from a hash. If a restricted hash has
any of its keys marked as readonly and the key is subsequently
deleted, the key is not actually deleted but is marked by
assigning it a value of &PL_sv_placeholder. This tags it so it
will be ignored by future operations such as iterating over the
hash, but will still allow the hash to have a value reassigned
to the key at some future point. This function clears any such
placeholder keys from the hash. See "Hash::Util::lock_keys()"
for an example of its use.
void hv_clear_placeholders(HV *hv)
hv_copy_hints_hv
A specialised version of "newHVhv" for copying "%^H". "ohv"
must be a pointer to a hash (which may have "%^H" magic, but
should be generally non-magical), or "NULL" (interpreted as an
empty hash). The content of "ohv" is copied to a new hash,
which has the "%^H"-specific magic added to it. A pointer to
the new hash is returned.
HV * hv_copy_hints_hv(HV *ohv)
hv_delete
Deletes a key/value pair in the hash. The value's SV is
removed from the hash, made mortal, and returned to the caller.
The absolute value of "klen" is the length of the key. If
"klen" is negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded
Unicode. The "flags" value will normally be zero; if set to
"G_DISCARD" then "NULL" will be returned. "NULL" will also be
returned if the key is not found.
SV* hv_delete(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
I32 flags)
hv_delete_ent
Deletes a key/value pair in the hash. The value SV is removed
from the hash, made mortal, and returned to the caller. The
"flags" value will normally be zero; if set to "G_DISCARD" then
"NULL" will be returned. "NULL" will also be returned if the
key is not found. "hash" can be a valid precomputed hash
value, or 0 to ask for it to be computed.
SV* hv_delete_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, I32 flags,
U32 hash)
HvENAME Returns the effective name of a stash, or NULL if there is
none. The effective name represents a location in the symbol
table where this stash resides. It is updated automatically
when packages are aliased or deleted. A stash that is no
longer in the symbol table has no effective name. This name is
preferable to "HvNAME" for use in MRO linearisations and isa
caches.
char* HvENAME(HV* stash)
HvENAMELEN
Returns the length of the stash's effective name.
STRLEN HvENAMELEN(HV *stash)
HvENAMEUTF8
Returns true if the effective name is in UTF-8 encoding.
unsigned char HvENAMEUTF8(HV *stash)
hv_exists
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified hash key
exists. The absolute value of "klen" is the length of the key.
If "klen" is negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded
Unicode.
bool hv_exists(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen)
hv_exists_ent
Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified hash key
exists. "hash" can be a valid precomputed hash value, or 0 to
ask for it to be computed.
bool hv_exists_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, U32 hash)
hv_fetch
Returns the SV which corresponds to the specified key in the
hash. The absolute value of "klen" is the length of the key.
If "klen" is negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded
Unicode. If "lval" is set then the fetch will be part of a
store. This means that if there is no value in the hash
associated with the given key, then one is created and a
pointer to it is returned. The "SV*" it points to can be
assigned to. But always check that the return value is non-
null before dereferencing it to an "SV*".
See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in
perlguts for more information on how to use this function on
tied hashes.
SV** hv_fetch(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
I32 lval)
hv_fetchs
Like "hv_fetch", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
SV** hv_fetchs(HV* tb, const char* key, I32 lval)
hv_fetch_ent
Returns the hash entry which corresponds to the specified key
in the hash. "hash" must be a valid precomputed hash number
for the given "key", or 0 if you want the function to compute
it. IF "lval" is set then the fetch will be part of a store.
Make sure the return value is non-null before accessing it.
The return value when "hv" is a tied hash is a pointer to a
static location, so be sure to make a copy of the structure if
you need to store it somewhere.
See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in
perlguts for more information on how to use this function on
tied hashes.
HE* hv_fetch_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, I32 lval,
U32 hash)
hv_fill Returns the number of hash buckets that happen to be in use.
This function is wrapped by the macro "HvFILL".
Previously this value was always stored in the HV structure,
which created an overhead on every hash (and pretty much every
object) for something that was rarely used. Now we calculate
it on demand the first time that it is needed, and cache it if
that calculation is going to be costly to repeat. The cached
value is updated by insertions and deletions, but (currently)
discarded if the hash is split.
STRLEN hv_fill(HV *const hv)
hv_iterinit
Prepares a starting point to traverse a hash table. Returns
the number of keys in the hash (i.e. the same as
"HvUSEDKEYS(hv)"). The return value is currently only
meaningful for hashes without tie magic.
NOTE: Before version 5.004_65, "hv_iterinit" used to return the
number of hash buckets that happen to be in use. If you still
need that esoteric value, you can get it through the macro
"HvFILL(hv)".
I32 hv_iterinit(HV *hv)
hv_iterkey
Returns the key from the current position of the hash iterator.
See "hv_iterinit".
char* hv_iterkey(HE* entry, I32* retlen)
hv_iterkeysv
Returns the key as an "SV*" from the current position of the
hash iterator. The return value will always be a mortal copy
of the key. Also see "hv_iterinit".
SV* hv_iterkeysv(HE* entry)
hv_iternext
Returns entries from a hash iterator. See "hv_iterinit".
You may call "hv_delete" or "hv_delete_ent" on the hash entry
that the iterator currently points to, without losing your
place or invalidating your iterator. Note that in this case
the current entry is deleted from the hash with your iterator
holding the last reference to it. Your iterator is flagged to
free the entry on the next call to "hv_iternext", so you must
not discard your iterator immediately else the entry will leak
- call "hv_iternext" to trigger the resource deallocation.
HE* hv_iternext(HV *hv)
hv_iternextsv
Performs an "hv_iternext", "hv_iterkey", and "hv_iterval" in
one operation.
SV* hv_iternextsv(HV *hv, char **key, I32 *retlen)
hv_iternext_flags
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Returns entries from a hash iterator. See "hv_iterinit" and
"hv_iternext". The "flags" value will normally be zero; if
"HV_ITERNEXT_WANTPLACEHOLDERS" is set the placeholders keys
(for restricted hashes) will be returned in addition to normal
keys. By default placeholders are automatically skipped over.
Currently a placeholder is implemented with a value that is
&PL_sv_placeholder. Note that the implementation of
placeholders and restricted hashes may change, and the
implementation currently is insufficiently abstracted for any
change to be tidy.
HE* hv_iternext_flags(HV *hv, I32 flags)
hv_iterval
Returns the value from the current position of the hash
iterator. See "hv_iterkey".
SV* hv_iterval(HV *hv, HE *entry)
hv_magic
Adds magic to a hash. See "sv_magic".
void hv_magic(HV *hv, GV *gv, int how)
HvNAME Returns the package name of a stash, or "NULL" if "stash" isn't
a stash. See "SvSTASH", "CvSTASH".
char* HvNAME(HV* stash)
HvNAMELEN
Returns the length of the stash's name.
STRLEN HvNAMELEN(HV *stash)
HvNAMEUTF8
Returns true if the name is in UTF-8 encoding.
unsigned char HvNAMEUTF8(HV *stash)
hv_scalar
Evaluates the hash in scalar context and returns the result.
Handles magic when the hash is tied.
SV* hv_scalar(HV *hv)
hv_store
Stores an SV in a hash. The hash key is specified as "key" and
the absolute value of "klen" is the length of the key. If
"klen" is negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded
Unicode. The "hash" parameter is the precomputed hash value;
if it is zero then Perl will compute it.
The return value will be "NULL" if the operation failed or if
the value did not need to be actually stored within the hash
(as in the case of tied hashes). Otherwise it can be
dereferenced to get the original "SV*". Note that the caller
is responsible for suitably incrementing the reference count of
"val" before the call, and decrementing it if the function
returned "NULL". Effectively a successful "hv_store" takes
ownership of one reference to "val". This is usually what you
want; a newly created SV has a reference count of one, so if
all your code does is create SVs then store them in a hash,
"hv_store" will own the only reference to the new SV, and your
code doesn't need to do anything further to tidy up.
"hv_store" is not implemented as a call to "hv_store_ent", and
does not create a temporary SV for the key, so if your key data
is not already in SV form then use "hv_store" in preference to
"hv_store_ent".
See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in
perlguts for more information on how to use this function on
tied hashes.
SV** hv_store(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
SV *val, U32 hash)
hv_stores
Like "hv_store", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair and omits the hash parameter.
SV** hv_stores(HV* tb, const char* key,
NULLOK SV* val)
hv_store_ent
Stores "val" in a hash. The hash key is specified as "key".
The "hash" parameter is the precomputed hash value; if it is
zero then Perl will compute it. The return value is the new
hash entry so created. It will be "NULL" if the operation
failed or if the value did not need to be actually stored
within the hash (as in the case of tied hashes). Otherwise the
contents of the return value can be accessed using the "He?"
macros described here. Note that the caller is responsible for
suitably incrementing the reference count of "val" before the
call, and decrementing it if the function returned NULL.
Effectively a successful "hv_store_ent" takes ownership of one
reference to "val". This is usually what you want; a newly
created SV has a reference count of one, so if all your code
does is create SVs then store them in a hash, "hv_store" will
own the only reference to the new SV, and your code doesn't
need to do anything further to tidy up. Note that
"hv_store_ent" only reads the "key"; unlike "val" it does not
take ownership of it, so maintaining the correct reference
count on "key" is entirely the caller's responsibility.
"hv_store" is not implemented as a call to "hv_store_ent", and
does not create a temporary SV for the key, so if your key data
is not already in SV form then use "hv_store" in preference to
"hv_store_ent".
See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in
perlguts for more information on how to use this function on
tied hashes.
HE* hv_store_ent(HV *hv, SV *key, SV *val, U32 hash)
hv_undef
Undefines the hash. The XS equivalent of "undef(%hash)".
As well as freeing all the elements of the hash (like
"hv_clear()"), this also frees any auxiliary data and storage
associated with the hash.
See "av_clear" for a note about the hash possibly being invalid
on return.
void hv_undef(HV *hv)
newHV Creates a new HV. The reference count is set to 1.
HV* newHV()
Hook manipulation
These functions provide convenient and thread-safe means of
manipulating hook variables.
wrap_op_checker
Puts a C function into the chain of check functions for a
specified op type. This is the preferred way to manipulate the
"PL_check" array. "opcode" specifies which type of op is to be
affected. "new_checker" is a pointer to the C function that is
to be added to that opcode's check chain, and "old_checker_p"
points to the storage location where a pointer to the next
function in the chain will be stored. The value of
"new_pointer" is written into the "PL_check" array, while the
value previously stored there is written to *old_checker_p.
The function should be defined like this:
static OP *new_checker(pTHX_ OP *op) { ... }
It is intended to be called in this manner:
new_checker(aTHX_ op)
"old_checker_p" should be defined like this:
static Perl_check_t old_checker_p;
"PL_check" is global to an entire process, and a module wishing
to hook op checking may find itself invoked more than once per
process, typically in different threads. To handle that
situation, this function is idempotent. The location
*old_checker_p must initially (once per process) contain a null
pointer. A C variable of static duration (declared at file
scope, typically also marked "static" to give it internal
linkage) will be implicitly initialised appropriately, if it
does not have an explicit initialiser. This function will only
actually modify the check chain if it finds *old_checker_p to
be null. This function is also thread safe on the small scale.
It uses appropriate locking to avoid race conditions in
accessing "PL_check".
When this function is called, the function referenced by
"new_checker" must be ready to be called, except for
*old_checker_p being unfilled. In a threading situation,
"new_checker" may be called immediately, even before this
function has returned. *old_checker_p will always be
appropriately set before "new_checker" is called. If
"new_checker" decides not to do anything special with an op
that it is given (which is the usual case for most uses of op
check hooking), it must chain the check function referenced by
*old_checker_p.
If you want to influence compilation of calls to a specific
subroutine, then use "cv_set_call_checker" rather than hooking
checking of all "entersub" ops.
void wrap_op_checker(Optype opcode,
Perl_check_t new_checker,
Perl_check_t *old_checker_p)
Lexer interface
This is the lower layer of the Perl parser, managing characters and
tokens.
lex_bufutf8
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Indicates whether the octets in the lexer buffer
("PL_parser->linestr") should be interpreted as the UTF-8
encoding of Unicode characters. If not, they should be
interpreted as Latin-1 characters. This is analogous to the
"SvUTF8" flag for scalars.
In UTF-8 mode, it is not guaranteed that the lexer buffer
actually contains valid UTF-8. Lexing code must be robust in
the face of invalid encoding.
The actual "SvUTF8" flag of the "PL_parser->linestr" scalar is
significant, but not the whole story regarding the input
character encoding. Normally, when a file is being read, the
scalar contains octets and its "SvUTF8" flag is off, but the
octets should be interpreted as UTF-8 if the "use utf8" pragma
is in effect. During a string eval, however, the scalar may
have the "SvUTF8" flag on, and in this case its octets should
be interpreted as UTF-8 unless the "use bytes" pragma is in
effect. This logic may change in the future; use this function
instead of implementing the logic yourself.
bool lex_bufutf8()
lex_discard_to
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Discards the first part of the "PL_parser->linestr" buffer, up
to "ptr". The remaining content of the buffer will be moved,
and all pointers into the buffer updated appropriately. "ptr"
must not be later in the buffer than the position of
"PL_parser->bufptr": it is not permitted to discard text that
has yet to be lexed.
Normally it is not necessarily to do this directly, because it
suffices to use the implicit discarding behaviour of
"lex_next_chunk" and things based on it. However, if a token
stretches across multiple lines, and the lexing code has kept
multiple lines of text in the buffer for that purpose, then
after completion of the token it would be wise to explicitly
discard the now-unneeded earlier lines, to avoid future multi-
line tokens growing the buffer without bound.
void lex_discard_to(char *ptr)
lex_grow_linestr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Reallocates the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr") to
accommodate at least "len" octets (including terminating
"NUL"). Returns a pointer to the reallocated buffer. This is
necessary before making any direct modification of the buffer
that would increase its length. "lex_stuff_pvn" provides a
more convenient way to insert text into the buffer.
Do not use "SvGROW" or "sv_grow" directly on
"PL_parser->linestr"; this function updates all of the lexer's
variables that point directly into the buffer.
char * lex_grow_linestr(STRLEN len)
lex_next_chunk
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Reads in the next chunk of text to be lexed, appending it to
"PL_parser->linestr". This should be called when lexing code
has looked to the end of the current chunk and wants to know
more. It is usual, but not necessary, for lexing to have
consumed the entirety of the current chunk at this time.
If "PL_parser->bufptr" is pointing to the very end of the
current chunk (i.e., the current chunk has been entirely
consumed), normally the current chunk will be discarded at the
same time that the new chunk is read in. If "flags" has the
"LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" bit set, the current chunk will not be
discarded. If the current chunk has not been entirely
consumed, then it will not be discarded regardless of the flag.
Returns true if some new text was added to the buffer, or false
if the buffer has reached the end of the input text.
bool lex_next_chunk(U32 flags)
lex_peek_unichar
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Looks ahead one (Unicode) character in the text currently being
lexed. Returns the codepoint (unsigned integer value) of the
next character, or -1 if lexing has reached the end of the
input text. To consume the peeked character, use
"lex_read_unichar".
If the next character is in (or extends into) the next chunk of
input text, the next chunk will be read in. Normally the
current chunk will be discarded at the same time, but if
"flags" has the "LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" bit set, then the current
chunk will not be discarded.
If the input is being interpreted as UTF-8 and a UTF-8 encoding
error is encountered, an exception is generated.
I32 lex_peek_unichar(U32 flags)
lex_read_space
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Reads optional spaces, in Perl style, in the text currently
being lexed. The spaces may include ordinary whitespace
characters and Perl-style comments. "#line" directives are
processed if encountered. "PL_parser->bufptr" is moved past
the spaces, so that it points at a non-space character (or the
end of the input text).
If spaces extend into the next chunk of input text, the next
chunk will be read in. Normally the current chunk will be
discarded at the same time, but if "flags" has the
"LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" bit set, then the current chunk will not be
discarded.
void lex_read_space(U32 flags)
lex_read_to
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Consume text in the lexer buffer, from "PL_parser->bufptr" up
to "ptr". This advances "PL_parser->bufptr" to match "ptr",
performing the correct bookkeeping whenever a newline character
is passed. This is the normal way to consume lexed text.
Interpretation of the buffer's octets can be abstracted out by
using the slightly higher-level functions "lex_peek_unichar"
and "lex_read_unichar".
void lex_read_to(char *ptr)
lex_read_unichar
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Reads the next (Unicode) character in the text currently being
lexed. Returns the codepoint (unsigned integer value) of the
character read, and moves "PL_parser->bufptr" past the
character, or returns -1 if lexing has reached the end of the
input text. To non-destructively examine the next character,
use "lex_peek_unichar" instead.
If the next character is in (or extends into) the next chunk of
input text, the next chunk will be read in. Normally the
current chunk will be discarded at the same time, but if
"flags" has the "LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" bit set, then the current
chunk will not be discarded.
If the input is being interpreted as UTF-8 and a UTF-8 encoding
error is encountered, an exception is generated.
I32 lex_read_unichar(U32 flags)
lex_start
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Creates and initialises a new lexer/parser state object,
supplying a context in which to lex and parse from a new source
of Perl code. A pointer to the new state object is placed in
"PL_parser". An entry is made on the save stack so that upon
unwinding the new state object will be destroyed and the former
value of "PL_parser" will be restored. Nothing else need be
done to clean up the parsing context.
The code to be parsed comes from "line" and "rsfp". "line", if
non-null, provides a string (in SV form) containing code to be
parsed. A copy of the string is made, so subsequent
modification of "line" does not affect parsing. "rsfp", if
non-null, provides an input stream from which code will be read
to be parsed. If both are non-null, the code in "line" comes
first and must consist of complete lines of input, and "rsfp"
supplies the remainder of the source.
The "flags" parameter is reserved for future use. Currently it
is only used by perl internally, so extensions should always
pass zero.
void lex_start(SV *line, PerlIO *rsfp, U32 flags)
lex_stuff_pv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Insert characters into the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr"),
immediately after the current lexing point
("PL_parser->bufptr"), reallocating the buffer if necessary.
This means that lexing code that runs later will see the
characters as if they had appeared in the input. It is not
recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses
of this facility run the risk of the inserted characters being
interpreted in an unintended manner.
The string to be inserted is represented by octets starting at
"pv" and continuing to the first nul. These octets are
interpreted as either UTF-8 or Latin-1, according to whether
the "LEX_STUFF_UTF8" flag is set in "flags". The characters
are recoded for the lexer buffer, according to how the buffer
is currently being interpreted ("lex_bufutf8"). If it is not
convenient to nul-terminate a string to be inserted, the
"lex_stuff_pvn" function is more appropriate.
void lex_stuff_pv(const char *pv, U32 flags)
lex_stuff_pvn
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Insert characters into the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr"),
immediately after the current lexing point
("PL_parser->bufptr"), reallocating the buffer if necessary.
This means that lexing code that runs later will see the
characters as if they had appeared in the input. It is not
recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses
of this facility run the risk of the inserted characters being
interpreted in an unintended manner.
The string to be inserted is represented by "len" octets
starting at "pv". These octets are interpreted as either UTF-8
or Latin-1, according to whether the "LEX_STUFF_UTF8" flag is
set in "flags". The characters are recoded for the lexer
buffer, according to how the buffer is currently being
interpreted ("lex_bufutf8"). If a string to be inserted is
available as a Perl scalar, the "lex_stuff_sv" function is more
convenient.
void lex_stuff_pvn(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
U32 flags)
lex_stuff_pvs
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Like "lex_stuff_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
void lex_stuff_pvs(const char *pv, U32 flags)
lex_stuff_sv
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Insert characters into the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr"),
immediately after the current lexing point
("PL_parser->bufptr"), reallocating the buffer if necessary.
This means that lexing code that runs later will see the
characters as if they had appeared in the input. It is not
recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses
of this facility run the risk of the inserted characters being
interpreted in an unintended manner.
The string to be inserted is the string value of "sv". The
characters are recoded for the lexer buffer, according to how
the buffer is currently being interpreted ("lex_bufutf8"). If
a string to be inserted is not already a Perl scalar, the
"lex_stuff_pvn" function avoids the need to construct a scalar.
void lex_stuff_sv(SV *sv, U32 flags)
lex_unstuff
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Discards text about to be lexed, from "PL_parser->bufptr" up to
"ptr". Text following "ptr" will be moved, and the buffer
shortened. This hides the discarded text from any lexing code
that runs later, as if the text had never appeared.
This is not the normal way to consume lexed text. For that,
use "lex_read_to".
void lex_unstuff(char *ptr)
parse_arithexpr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a Perl arithmetic expression. This may contain operators
of precedence down to the bit shift operators. The expression
must be followed (and thus terminated) either by a comparison
or lower-precedence operator or by something that would
normally terminate an expression such as semicolon. If "flags"
has the "PARSE_OPTIONAL" bit set, then the expression is
optional, otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to
ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is
correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed
and the lexical context for the expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an
optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned,
otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in
the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at
the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will
throw an exception immediately.
OP * parse_arithexpr(U32 flags)
parse_barestmt
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a single unadorned Perl statement. This may be a normal
imperative statement or a declaration that has compile-time
effect. It does not include any label or other affixture. It
is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state
("PL_parser" et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of
the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
statement.
The op tree representing the statement is returned. This may
be a null pointer if the statement is null, for example if it
was actually a subroutine definition (which has compile-time
side effects). If not null, it will be ops directly
implementing the statement, suitable to pass to "newSTATEOP".
It will not normally include a "nextstate" or equivalent op
(except for those embedded in a scope contained entirely within
the statement).
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree (most likely null) is returned anyway. The error
is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a
single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all
the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors,
however, will throw an exception immediately.
The "flags" parameter is reserved for future use, and must
always be zero.
OP * parse_barestmt(U32 flags)
parse_block
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a single complete Perl code block. This consists of an
opening brace, a sequence of statements, and a closing brace.
The block constitutes a lexical scope, so "my" variables and
various compile-time effects can be contained within it. It is
up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state
("PL_parser" et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of
the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
statement.
The op tree representing the code block is returned. This is
always a real op, never a null pointer. It will normally be a
"lineseq" list, including "nextstate" or equivalent ops. No
ops to construct any kind of runtime scope are included by
virtue of it being a block.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree (most likely null) is returned anyway. The error
is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a
single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all
the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors,
however, will throw an exception immediately.
The "flags" parameter is reserved for future use, and must
always be zero.
OP * parse_block(U32 flags)
parse_fullexpr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a single complete Perl expression. This allows the full
expression grammar, including the lowest-precedence operators
such as "or". The expression must be followed (and thus
terminated) by a token that an expression would normally be
terminated by: end-of-file, closing bracketing punctuation,
semicolon, or one of the keywords that signals a postfix
expression-statement modifier. If "flags" has the
"PARSE_OPTIONAL" bit set, then the expression is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure
that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly
set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the
lexical context for the expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an
optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned,
otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in
the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at
the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will
throw an exception immediately.
OP * parse_fullexpr(U32 flags)
parse_fullstmt
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a single complete Perl statement. This may be a normal
imperative statement or a declaration that has compile-time
effect, and may include optional labels. It is up to the
caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et
al) is correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be
parsed and the lexical context for the statement.
The op tree representing the statement is returned. This may
be a null pointer if the statement is null, for example if it
was actually a subroutine definition (which has compile-time
side effects). If not null, it will be the result of a
"newSTATEOP" call, normally including a "nextstate" or
equivalent op.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree (most likely null) is returned anyway. The error
is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a
single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all
the compilation errors that occurred. Some compilation errors,
however, will throw an exception immediately.
The "flags" parameter is reserved for future use, and must
always be zero.
OP * parse_fullstmt(U32 flags)
parse_label
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a single label, possibly optional, of the type that may
prefix a Perl statement. It is up to the caller to ensure that
the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly set
to reflect the source of the code to be parsed. If "flags" has
the "PARSE_OPTIONAL" bit set, then the label is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory.
The name of the label is returned in the form of a fresh
scalar. If an optional label is absent, a null pointer is
returned.
If an error occurs in parsing, which can only occur if the
label is mandatory, a valid label is returned anyway. The
error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a
single exception at the top level of parsing which covers all
the compilation errors that occurred.
SV * parse_label(U32 flags)
parse_listexpr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a Perl list expression. This may contain operators of
precedence down to the comma operator. The expression must be
followed (and thus terminated) either by a low-precedence logic
operator such as "or" or by something that would normally
terminate an expression such as semicolon. If "flags" has the
"PARSE_OPTIONAL" bit set, then the expression is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure
that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly
set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the
lexical context for the expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an
optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned,
otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in
the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at
the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will
throw an exception immediately.
OP * parse_listexpr(U32 flags)
parse_stmtseq
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a sequence of zero or more Perl statements. These may be
normal imperative statements, including optional labels, or
declarations that have compile-time effect, or any mixture
thereof. The statement sequence ends when a closing brace or
end-of-file is encountered in a place where a new statement
could have validly started. It is up to the caller to ensure
that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly
set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the
lexical context for the statements.
The op tree representing the statement sequence is returned.
This may be a null pointer if the statements were all null, for
example if there were no statements or if there were only
subroutine definitions (which have compile-time side effects).
If not null, it will be a "lineseq" list, normally including
"nextstate" or equivalent ops.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in
the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at
the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will
throw an exception immediately.
The "flags" parameter is reserved for future use, and must
always be zero.
OP * parse_stmtseq(U32 flags)
parse_termexpr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Parse a Perl term expression. This may contain operators of
precedence down to the assignment operators. The expression
must be followed (and thus terminated) either by a comma or
lower-precedence operator or by something that would normally
terminate an expression such as semicolon. If "flags" has the
"PARSE_OPTIONAL" bit set, then the expression is optional,
otherwise it is mandatory. It is up to the caller to ensure
that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly
set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the
lexical context for the expression.
The op tree representing the expression is returned. If an
optional expression is absent, a null pointer is returned,
otherwise the pointer will be non-null.
If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a
valid op tree is returned anyway. The error is reflected in
the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at
the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation
errors that occurred. Some compilation errors, however, will
throw an exception immediately.
OP * parse_termexpr(U32 flags)
PL_parser
Pointer to a structure encapsulating the state of the parsing
operation currently in progress. The pointer can be locally
changed to perform a nested parse without interfering with the
state of an outer parse. Individual members of "PL_parser"
have their own documentation.
PL_parser->bufend
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Direct pointer to the end of the chunk of text currently being
lexed, the end of the lexer buffer. This is equal to
"SvPVX(PL_parser->linestr) + SvCUR(PL_parser->linestr)". A
"NUL" character (zero octet) is always located at the end of
the buffer, and does not count as part of the buffer's
contents.
PL_parser->bufptr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Points to the current position of lexing inside the lexer
buffer. Characters around this point may be freely examined,
within the range delimited by "SvPVX("PL_parser->linestr")" and
"PL_parser->bufend". The octets of the buffer may be intended
to be interpreted as either UTF-8 or Latin-1, as indicated by
"lex_bufutf8".
Lexing code (whether in the Perl core or not) moves this
pointer past the characters that it consumes. It is also
expected to perform some bookkeeping whenever a newline
character is consumed. This movement can be more conveniently
performed by the function "lex_read_to", which handles newlines
appropriately.
Interpretation of the buffer's octets can be abstracted out by
using the slightly higher-level functions "lex_peek_unichar"
and "lex_read_unichar".
PL_parser->linestart
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Points to the start of the current line inside the lexer
buffer. This is useful for indicating at which column an error
occurred, and not much else. This must be updated by any
lexing code that consumes a newline; the function "lex_read_to"
handles this detail.
PL_parser->linestr
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Buffer scalar containing the chunk currently under
consideration of the text currently being lexed. This is
always a plain string scalar (for which "SvPOK" is true). It
is not intended to be used as a scalar by normal scalar means;
instead refer to the buffer directly by the pointer variables
described below.
The lexer maintains various "char*" pointers to things in the
"PL_parser->linestr" buffer. If "PL_parser->linestr" is ever
reallocated, all of these pointers must be updated. Don't
attempt to do this manually, but rather use "lex_grow_linestr"
if you need to reallocate the buffer.
The content of the text chunk in the buffer is commonly exactly
one complete line of input, up to and including a newline
terminator, but there are situations where it is otherwise.
The octets of the buffer may be intended to be interpreted as
either UTF-8 or Latin-1. The function "lex_bufutf8" tells you
which. Do not use the "SvUTF8" flag on this scalar, which may
disagree with it.
For direct examination of the buffer, the variable
"PL_parser->bufend" points to the end of the buffer. The
current lexing position is pointed to by "PL_parser->bufptr".
Direct use of these pointers is usually preferable to
examination of the scalar through normal scalar means.
Locale-related functions and macros
DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION
This macro should be used as a statement. It declares a
private variable (whose name begins with an underscore) that is
needed by the other macros in this section. Failing to include
this correctly should lead to a syntax error. For
compatibility with C89 C compilers it should be placed in a
block before any executable statements.
void DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION
RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC
This is used in conjunction with one of the macros
"STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED" and
"STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING"
to properly restore the "LC_NUMERIC" state.
A call to "DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION" must have
been made to declare at compile time a private variable used by
this macro and the two "STORE" ones. This macro should be
called as a single statement, not an expression, but with an
empty argument list, like this:
{
DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION;
...
RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC();
...
}
void RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC()
STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING
This is used by XS code that that is "LC_NUMERIC" locale-aware
to force the locale for category "LC_NUMERIC" to be what perl
thinks is the current underlying locale. (The perl interpreter
could be wrong about what the underlying locale actually is if
some C or XS code has called the C library function
setlocale(3) behind its back; calling "sync_locale" before
calling this macro will update perl's records.)
A call to "DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION" must have
been made to declare at compile time a private variable used by
this macro. This macro should be called as a single statement,
not an expression, but with an empty argument list, like this:
{
DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION;
...
STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING();
...
RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC();
...
}
The private variable is used to save the current locale state,
so that the requisite matching call to "RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC" can
restore it.
void STORE_LC_NUMERIC_FORCE_TO_UNDERLYING()
STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED
This is used to help wrap XS or C code that that is
"LC_NUMERIC" locale-aware. This locale category is generally
kept set to the C locale by Perl for backwards compatibility,
and because most XS code that reads floating point values can
cope only with the decimal radix character being a dot.
This macro makes sure the current "LC_NUMERIC" state is set
properly, to be aware of locale if the call to the XS or C code
from the Perl program is from within the scope of a
"uselocale"; or to ignore locale if the call is instead from
outside such scope.
This macro is the start of wrapping the C or XS code; the wrap
ending is done by calling the "RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC" macro after
the operation. Otherwise the state can be changed that will
adversely affect other XS code.
A call to "DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION" must have
been made to declare at compile time a private variable used by
this macro. This macro should be called as a single statement,
not an expression, but with an empty argument list, like this:
{
DECLARATION_FOR_LC_NUMERIC_MANIPULATION;
...
STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED();
...
RESTORE_LC_NUMERIC();
...
}
void STORE_LC_NUMERIC_SET_TO_NEEDED()
sync_locale
Changing the program's locale should be avoided by XS code.
Nevertheless, certain non-Perl libraries called from XS, such
as "Gtk" do so. When this happens, Perl needs to be told that
the locale has changed. Use this function to do so, before
returning to Perl.
void sync_locale()
Magical Functions
mg_clear
Clear something magical that the SV represents. See
"sv_magic".
int mg_clear(SV* sv)
mg_copy Copies the magic from one SV to another. See "sv_magic".
int mg_copy(SV *sv, SV *nsv, const char *key,
I32 klen)
mg_find Finds the magic pointer for "type" matching the SV. See
"sv_magic".
MAGIC* mg_find(const SV* sv, int type)
mg_findext
Finds the magic pointer of "type" with the given "vtbl" for the
"SV". See "sv_magicext".
MAGIC* mg_findext(const SV* sv, int type,
const MGVTBL *vtbl)
mg_free Free any magic storage used by the SV. See "sv_magic".
int mg_free(SV* sv)
mg_free_type
Remove any magic of type "how" from the SV "sv". See
"sv_magic".
void mg_free_type(SV *sv, int how)
mg_get Do magic before a value is retrieved from the SV. The type of
SV must be >= "SVt_PVMG". See "sv_magic".
int mg_get(SV* sv)
mg_length
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Reports on the SV's length in bytes, calling length magic if
available, but does not set the UTF8 flag on "sv". It will
fall back to 'get' magic if there is no 'length' magic, but
with no indication as to whether it called 'get' magic. It
assumes "sv" is a "PVMG" or higher. Use "sv_len()" instead.
U32 mg_length(SV* sv)
mg_magical
Turns on the magical status of an SV. See "sv_magic".
void mg_magical(SV* sv)
mg_set Do magic after a value is assigned to the SV. See "sv_magic".
int mg_set(SV* sv)
SvGETMAGIC
Invokes "mg_get" on an SV if it has 'get' magic. For example,
this will call "FETCH" on a tied variable. This macro
evaluates its argument more than once.
void SvGETMAGIC(SV* sv)
SvLOCK Arranges for a mutual exclusion lock to be obtained on "sv" if
a suitable module has been loaded.
void SvLOCK(SV* sv)
SvSETMAGIC
Invokes "mg_set" on an SV if it has 'set' magic. This is
necessary after modifying a scalar, in case it is a magical
variable like $| or a tied variable (it calls "STORE"). This
macro evaluates its argument more than once.
void SvSETMAGIC(SV* sv)
SvSetMagicSV
Like "SvSetSV", but does any set magic required afterwards.
void SvSetMagicSV(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
SvSetMagicSV_nosteal
Like "SvSetSV_nosteal", but does any set magic required
afterwards.
void SvSetMagicSV_nosteal(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
SvSetSV Calls "sv_setsv" if "dsv" is not the same as "ssv". May
evaluate arguments more than once. Does not handle 'set' magic
on the destination SV.
void SvSetSV(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
SvSetSV_nosteal
Calls a non-destructive version of "sv_setsv" if "dsv" is not
the same as "ssv". May evaluate arguments more than once.
void SvSetSV_nosteal(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
SvSHARE Arranges for "sv" to be shared between threads if a suitable
module has been loaded.
void SvSHARE(SV* sv)
SvUNLOCK
Releases a mutual exclusion lock on "sv" if a suitable module
has been loaded.
void SvUNLOCK(SV* sv)
Memory Management
Copy The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "memcpy" function. The
"src" is the source, "dest" is the destination, "nitems" is the
number of items, and "type" is the type. May fail on
overlapping copies. See also "Move".
void Copy(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
CopyD Like "Copy" but returns "dest". Useful for encouraging
compilers to tail-call optimise.
void * CopyD(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
Move The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "memmove" function. The
"src" is the source, "dest" is the destination, "nitems" is the
number of items, and "type" is the type. Can do overlapping
moves. See also "Copy".
void Move(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
MoveD Like "Move" but returns "dest". Useful for encouraging
compilers to tail-call optimise.
void * MoveD(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)
Newx The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "malloc" function.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with "Safefree".
In 5.9.3, Newx() and friends replace the older New() API, and
drops the first parameter, x, a debug aid which allowed callers
to identify themselves. This aid has been superseded by a new
build option, PERL_MEM_LOG (see "PERL_MEM_LOG" in
perlhacktips). The older API is still there for use in XS
modules supporting older perls.
void Newx(void* ptr, int nitems, type)
Newxc The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "malloc" function, with
cast. See also "Newx".
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with "Safefree".
void Newxc(void* ptr, int nitems, type, cast)
Newxz The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "malloc" function. The
allocated memory is zeroed with "memzero". See also "Newx".
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with "Safefree".
void Newxz(void* ptr, int nitems, type)
Poison PoisonWith(0xEF) for catching access to freed memory.
void Poison(void* dest, int nitems, type)
PoisonFree
PoisonWith(0xEF) for catching access to freed memory.
void PoisonFree(void* dest, int nitems, type)
PoisonNew
PoisonWith(0xAB) for catching access to allocated but
uninitialized memory.
void PoisonNew(void* dest, int nitems, type)
PoisonWith
Fill up memory with a byte pattern (a byte repeated over and
over again) that hopefully catches attempts to access
uninitialized memory.
void PoisonWith(void* dest, int nitems, type,
U8 byte)
Renew The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "realloc" function.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with "Safefree".
void Renew(void* ptr, int nitems, type)
Renewc The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "realloc" function, with
cast.
Memory obtained by this should ONLY be freed with "Safefree".
void Renewc(void* ptr, int nitems, type, cast)
Safefree
The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "free" function.
This should ONLY be used on memory obtained using "Newx" and
friends.
void Safefree(void* ptr)
savepv Perl's version of "strdup()". Returns a pointer to a newly
allocated string which is a duplicate of "pv". The size of the
string is determined by "strlen()", which means it may not
contain embedded "NUL" characters and must have a trailing
"NUL". The memory allocated for the new string can be freed
with the "Safefree()" function.
On some platforms, Windows for example, all allocated memory
owned by a thread is deallocated when that thread ends. So if
you need that not to happen, you need to use the shared memory
functions, such as "savesharedpv".
char* savepv(const char* pv)
savepvn Perl's version of what "strndup()" would be if it existed.
Returns a pointer to a newly allocated string which is a
duplicate of the first "len" bytes from "pv", plus a trailing
"NUL" byte. The memory allocated for the new string can be
freed with the "Safefree()" function.
On some platforms, Windows for example, all allocated memory
owned by a thread is deallocated when that thread ends. So if
you need that not to happen, you need to use the shared memory
functions, such as "savesharedpvn".
char* savepvn(const char* pv, I32 len)
savepvs Like "savepvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
char* savepvs(const char* s)
savesharedpv
A version of "savepv()" which allocates the duplicate string in
memory which is shared between threads.
char* savesharedpv(const char* pv)
savesharedpvn
A version of "savepvn()" which allocates the duplicate string
in memory which is shared between threads. (With the specific
difference that a "NULL" pointer is not acceptable)
char* savesharedpvn(const char *const pv,
const STRLEN len)
savesharedpvs
A version of "savepvs()" which allocates the duplicate string
in memory which is shared between threads.
char* savesharedpvs(const char* s)
savesharedsvpv
A version of "savesharedpv()" which allocates the duplicate
string in memory which is shared between threads.
char* savesharedsvpv(SV *sv)
savesvpv
A version of "savepv()"/"savepvn()" which gets the string to
duplicate from the passed in SV using "SvPV()"
On some platforms, Windows for example, all allocated memory
owned by a thread is deallocated when that thread ends. So if
you need that not to happen, you need to use the shared memory
functions, such as "savesharedsvpv".
char* savesvpv(SV* sv)
StructCopy
This is an architecture-independent macro to copy one structure
to another.
void StructCopy(type *src, type *dest, type)
Zero The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "memzero" function. The
"dest" is the destination, "nitems" is the number of items, and
"type" is the type.
void Zero(void* dest, int nitems, type)
ZeroD Like "Zero" but returns dest. Useful for encouraging compilers
to tail-call optimise.
void * ZeroD(void* dest, int nitems, type)
Miscellaneous Functions
dump_c_backtrace
Dumps the C backtrace to the given "fp".
Returns true if a backtrace could be retrieved, false if not.
bool dump_c_backtrace(PerlIO* fp, int max_depth,
int skip)
fbm_compile
Analyses the string in order to make fast searches on it using
"fbm_instr()" -- the Boyer-Moore algorithm.
void fbm_compile(SV* sv, U32 flags)
fbm_instr
Returns the location of the SV in the string delimited by "big"
and "bigend" ("bigend") is the char following the last char).
It returns "NULL" if the string can't be found. The "sv" does
not have to be "fbm_compiled", but the search will not be as
fast then.
char* fbm_instr(unsigned char* big,
unsigned char* bigend, SV* littlestr,
U32 flags)
foldEQ Returns true if the leading "len" bytes of the strings "s1" and
"s2" are the same case-insensitively; false otherwise.
Uppercase and lowercase ASCII range bytes match themselves and
their opposite case counterparts. Non-cased and non-ASCII
range bytes match only themselves.
I32 foldEQ(const char* a, const char* b, I32 len)
foldEQ_locale
Returns true if the leading "len" bytes of the strings "s1" and
"s2" are the same case-insensitively in the current locale;
false otherwise.
I32 foldEQ_locale(const char* a, const char* b,
I32 len)
form Takes a sprintf-style format pattern and conventional (non-SV)
arguments and returns the formatted string.
(char *) Perl_form(pTHX_ const char* pat, ...)
can be used any place a string (char *) is required:
char * s = Perl_form("%d.%d",major,minor);
Uses a single private buffer so if you want to format several
strings you must explicitly copy the earlier strings away (and
free the copies when you are done).
char* form(const char* pat, ...)
getcwd_sv
Fill "sv" with current working directory
int getcwd_sv(SV* sv)
get_c_backtrace_dump
Returns a SV containing a dump of "depth" frames of the call
stack, skipping the "skip" innermost ones. "depth" of 20 is
usually enough.
The appended output looks like:
... 1 10e004812:0082 Perl_croak util.c:1716
/usr/bin/perl 2 10df8d6d2:1d72 perl_parse perl.c:3975
/usr/bin/perl ...
The fields are tab-separated. The first column is the depth
(zero being the innermost non-skipped frame). In the
hex:offset, the hex is where the program counter was in
"S_parse_body", and the :offset (might be missing) tells how
much inside the "S_parse_body" the program counter was.
The "util.c:1716" is the source code file and line number.
The /usr/bin/perl is obvious (hopefully).
Unknowns are "-". Unknowns can happen unfortunately quite
easily: if the platform doesn't support retrieving the
information; if the binary is missing the debug information; if
the optimizer has transformed the code by for example inlining.
SV* get_c_backtrace_dump(int max_depth, int skip)
ibcmp This is a synonym for "(!foldEQ())"
I32 ibcmp(const char* a, const char* b, I32 len)
ibcmp_locale
This is a synonym for "(!foldEQ_locale())"
I32 ibcmp_locale(const char* a, const char* b,
I32 len)
is_safe_syscall
Test that the given "pv" doesn't contain any internal "NUL"
characters. If it does, set "errno" to "ENOENT", optionally
warn, and return FALSE.
Return TRUE if the name is safe.
Used by the "IS_SAFE_SYSCALL()" macro.
bool is_safe_syscall(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
const char *what,
const char *op_name)
memEQ Test two buffers (which may contain embedded "NUL" characters,
to see if they are equal. The "len" parameter indicates the
number of bytes to compare. Returns zero if equal, or non-zero
if non-equal.
bool memEQ(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
memNE Test two buffers (which may contain embedded "NUL" characters,
to see if they are not equal. The "len" parameter indicates
the number of bytes to compare. Returns zero if non-equal, or
non-zero if equal.
bool memNE(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
mess Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list. These
are used to generate a string message. If the message does not
end with a newline, then it will be extended with some
indication of the current location in the code, as described
for "mess_sv".
Normally, the resulting message is returned in a new mortal SV.
During global destruction a single SV may be shared between
uses of this function.
SV * mess(const char *pat, ...)
mess_sv Expands a message, intended for the user, to include an
indication of the current location in the code, if the message
does not already appear to be complete.
"basemsg" is the initial message or object. If it is a
reference, it will be used as-is and will be the result of this
function. Otherwise it is used as a string, and if it already
ends with a newline, it is taken to be complete, and the result
of this function will be the same string. If the message does
not end with a newline, then a segment such as "at foo.pl line
37" will be appended, and possibly other clauses indicating the
current state of execution. The resulting message will end
with a dot and a newline.
Normally, the resulting message is returned in a new mortal SV.
During global destruction a single SV may be shared between
uses of this function. If "consume" is true, then the function
is permitted (but not required) to modify and return "basemsg"
instead of allocating a new SV.
SV * mess_sv(SV *basemsg, bool consume)
my_snprintf
The C library "snprintf" functionality, if available and
standards-compliant (uses "vsnprintf", actually). However, if
the "vsnprintf" is not available, will unfortunately use the
unsafe "vsprintf" which can overrun the buffer (there is an
overrun check, but that may be too late). Consider using
"sv_vcatpvf" instead, or getting "vsnprintf".
int my_snprintf(char *buffer, const Size_t len,
const char *format, ...)
my_sprintf
The C library "sprintf", wrapped if necessary, to ensure that
it will return the length of the string written to the buffer.
Only rare pre-ANSI systems need the wrapper function - usually
this is a direct call to "sprintf".
int my_sprintf(char *buffer, const char *pat, ...)
my_strlcat
The C library "strlcat" if available, or a Perl implementation
of it. This operates on C "NUL"-terminated strings.
"my_strlcat()" appends string "src" to the end of "dst". It
will append at most "size-strlen(dst)-1" characters. It
will then "NUL"-terminate, unless "size" is 0 or the original
"dst" string was longer than "size" (in practice this should
not happen as it means that either "size" is incorrect or that
"dst" is not a proper "NUL"-terminated string).
Note that "size" is the full size of the destination buffer and
the result is guaranteed to be "NUL"-terminated if there is
room. Note that room for the "NUL" should be included in
"size".
Size_t my_strlcat(char *dst, const char *src,
Size_t size)
my_strlcpy
The C library "strlcpy" if available, or a Perl implementation
of it. This operates on C "NUL"-terminated strings.
"my_strlcpy()" copies up to "size-1" characters from the
string "src" to "dst", "NUL"-terminating the result if "size"
is not 0.
Size_t my_strlcpy(char *dst, const char *src,
Size_t size)
my_vsnprintf
The C library "vsnprintf" if available and standards-compliant.
However, if if the "vsnprintf" is not available, will
unfortunately use the unsafe "vsprintf" which can overrun the
buffer (there is an overrun check, but that may be too late).
Consider using "sv_vcatpvf" instead, or getting "vsnprintf".
int my_vsnprintf(char *buffer, const Size_t len,
const char *format, va_list ap)
ninstr Find the first (leftmost) occurrence of a sequence of bytes
within another sequence. This is the Perl version of
"strstr()", extended to handle arbitrary sequences, potentially
containing embedded "NUL" characters ("NUL" is what the initial
"n" in the function name stands for; some systems have an
equivalent, "memmem()", but with a somewhat different API).
Another way of thinking about this function is finding a needle
in a haystack. "big" points to the first byte in the haystack.
"big_end" points to one byte beyond the final byte in the
haystack. "little" points to the first byte in the needle.
"little_end" points to one byte beyond the final byte in the
needle. All the parameters must be non-"NULL".
The function returns "NULL" if there is no occurrence of
"little" within "big". If "little" is the empty string, "big"
is returned.
Because this function operates at the byte level, and because
of the inherent characteristics of UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC), it
will work properly if both the needle and the haystack are
strings with the same UTF-8ness, but not if the UTF-8ness
differs.
char * ninstr(char * big, char * bigend, char * little,
char * little_end)
PERL_SYS_INIT
Provides system-specific tune up of the C runtime environment
necessary to run Perl interpreters. This should be called only
once, before creating any Perl interpreters.
void PERL_SYS_INIT(int *argc, char*** argv)
PERL_SYS_INIT3
Provides system-specific tune up of the C runtime environment
necessary to run Perl interpreters. This should be called only
once, before creating any Perl interpreters.
void PERL_SYS_INIT3(int *argc, char*** argv,
char*** env)
PERL_SYS_TERM
Provides system-specific clean up of the C runtime environment
after running Perl interpreters. This should be called only
once, after freeing any remaining Perl interpreters.
void PERL_SYS_TERM()
quadmath_format_needed
"quadmath_format_needed()" returns true if the "format" string
seems to contain at least one non-Q-prefixed "%[efgaEFGA]"
format specifier, or returns false otherwise.
The format specifier detection is not complete printf-syntax
detection, but it should catch most common cases.
If true is returned, those arguments should in theory be
processed with "quadmath_snprintf()", but in case there is more
than one such format specifier (see "quadmath_format_single"),
and if there is anything else beyond that one (even just a
single byte), they cannot be processed because
"quadmath_snprintf()" is very strict, accepting only one format
spec, and nothing else. In this case, the code should probably
fail.
bool quadmath_format_needed(const char* format)
quadmath_format_single
"quadmath_snprintf()" is very strict about its "format" string
and will fail, returning -1, if the format is invalid. It
accepts exactly one format spec.
"quadmath_format_single()" checks that the intended single spec
looks sane: begins with "%", has only one "%", ends with
"[efgaEFGA]", and has "Q" before it. This is not a full
"printf syntax check", just the basics.
Returns the format if it is valid, NULL if not.
"quadmath_format_single()" can and will actually patch in the
missing "Q", if necessary. In this case it will return the
modified copy of the format, which the caller will need to
free.
See also "quadmath_format_needed".
const char* quadmath_format_single(const char* format)
READ_XDIGIT
Returns the value of an ASCII-range hex digit and advances the
string pointer. Behaviour is only well defined when
isXDIGIT(*str) is true.
U8 READ_XDIGIT(char str*)
rninstr Like "ninstr", but instead finds the final (rightmost)
occurrence of a sequence of bytes within another sequence,
returning "NULL" if there is no such occurrence.
char * rninstr(char * big, char * bigend,
char * little, char * little_end)
strEQ Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if they are equal.
Returns true or false.
bool strEQ(char* s1, char* s2)
strGE Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if the first, "s1", is
greater than or equal to the second, "s2". Returns true or
false.
bool strGE(char* s1, char* s2)
strGT Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if the first, "s1", is
greater than the second, "s2". Returns true or false.
bool strGT(char* s1, char* s2)
strLE Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if the first, "s1", is
less than or equal to the second, "s2". Returns true or false.
bool strLE(char* s1, char* s2)
strLT Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if the first, "s1", is
less than the second, "s2". Returns true or false.
bool strLT(char* s1, char* s2)
strNE Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if they are different.
Returns true or false.
bool strNE(char* s1, char* s2)
strnEQ Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if they are equal.
The "len" parameter indicates the number of bytes to compare.
Returns true or false. (A wrapper for "strncmp").
bool strnEQ(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
strnNE Test two "NUL"-terminated strings to see if they are different.
The "len" parameter indicates the number of bytes to compare.
Returns true or false. (A wrapper for "strncmp").
bool strnNE(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)
sv_destroyable
Dummy routine which reports that object can be destroyed when
there is no sharing module present. It ignores its single SV
argument, and returns 'true'. Exists to avoid test for a
"NULL" function pointer and because it could potentially warn
under some level of strict-ness.
bool sv_destroyable(SV *sv)
sv_nosharing
Dummy routine which "shares" an SV when there is no sharing
module present. Or "locks" it. Or "unlocks" it. In other
words, ignores its single SV argument. Exists to avoid test
for a "NULL" function pointer and because it could potentially
warn under some level of strict-ness.
void sv_nosharing(SV *sv)
vmess "pat" and "args" are a sprintf-style format pattern and
encapsulated argument list, respectively. These are used to
generate a string message. If the message does not end with a
newline, then it will be extended with some indication of the
current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".
Normally, the resulting message is returned in a new mortal SV.
During global destruction a single SV may be shared between
uses of this function.
SV * vmess(const char *pat, va_list *args)
MRO Functions
These functions are related to the method resolution order of perl
classes
mro_get_linear_isa
Returns the mro linearisation for the given stash. By default,
this will be whatever "mro_get_linear_isa_dfs" returns unless
some other MRO is in effect for the stash. The return value is
a read-only AV*.
You are responsible for "SvREFCNT_inc()" on the return value if
you plan to store it anywhere semi-permanently (otherwise it
might be deleted out from under you the next time the cache is
invalidated).
AV* mro_get_linear_isa(HV* stash)
mro_method_changed_in
Invalidates method caching on any child classes of the given
stash, so that they might notice the changes in this one.
Ideally, all instances of "PL_sub_generation++" in perl source
outside of mro.c should be replaced by calls to this.
Perl automatically handles most of the common ways a method
might be redefined. However, there are a few ways you could
change a method in a stash without the cache code noticing, in
which case you need to call this method afterwards:
1) Directly manipulating the stash HV entries from XS code.
2) Assigning a reference to a readonly scalar constant into a
stash entry in order to create a constant subroutine (like
constant.pm does).
This same method is available from pure perl via,
"mro::method_changed_in(classname)".
void mro_method_changed_in(HV* stash)
mro_register
Registers a custom mro plugin. See perlmroapi for details.
void mro_register(const struct mro_alg *mro)
Multicall Functions
dMULTICALL
Declare local variables for a multicall. See "LIGHTWEIGHT
CALLBACKS" in perlcall.
dMULTICALL;
MULTICALL
Make a lightweight callback. See "LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS" in
perlcall.
MULTICALL;
POP_MULTICALL
Closing bracket for a lightweight callback. See "LIGHTWEIGHT
CALLBACKS" in perlcall.
POP_MULTICALL;
PUSH_MULTICALL
Opening bracket for a lightweight callback. See "LIGHTWEIGHT
CALLBACKS" in perlcall.
PUSH_MULTICALL;
Numeric functions
grok_bin
converts a string representing a binary number to numeric form.
On entry "start" and *len give the string to scan, *flags gives
conversion flags, and "result" should be "NULL" or a pointer to
an NV. The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first
invalid character. Unless "PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT" is set
in *flags, encountering an invalid character will also trigger
a warning. On return *len is set to the length of the scanned
string, and *flags gives output flags.
If the value is <= "UV_MAX" it is returned as a UV, the output
flags are clear, and nothing is written to *result. If the
value is > "UV_MAX", "grok_bin" returns "UV_MAX", sets
"PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX" in the output flags, and writes
the value to *result (or the value is discarded if "result" is
NULL).
The binary number may optionally be prefixed with "0b" or "b"
unless "PERL_SCAN_DISALLOW_PREFIX" is set in *flags on entry.
If "PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES" is set in *flags then the
binary number may use "_" characters to separate digits.
UV grok_bin(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
I32* flags, NV *result)
grok_hex
converts a string representing a hex number to numeric form.
On entry "start" and *len_p give the string to scan, *flags
gives conversion flags, and "result" should be "NULL" or a
pointer to an NV. The scan stops at the end of the string, or
the first invalid character. Unless
"PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT" is set in *flags, encountering an
invalid character will also trigger a warning. On return *len
is set to the length of the scanned string, and *flags gives
output flags.
If the value is <= "UV_MAX" it is returned as a UV, the output
flags are clear, and nothing is written to *result. If the
value is > "UV_MAX", "grok_hex" returns "UV_MAX", sets
"PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX" in the output flags, and writes
the value to *result (or the value is discarded if "result" is
"NULL").
The hex number may optionally be prefixed with "0x" or "x"
unless "PERL_SCAN_DISALLOW_PREFIX" is set in *flags on entry.
If "PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES" is set in *flags then the hex
number may use "_" characters to separate digits.
UV grok_hex(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
I32* flags, NV *result)
grok_infnan
Helper for "grok_number()", accepts various ways of spelling
"infinity" or "not a number", and returns one of the following
flag combinations:
IS_NUMBER_INFINITE
IS_NUMBER_NAN
IS_NUMBER_INFINITE | IS_NUMBER_NEG
IS_NUMBER_NAN | IS_NUMBER_NEG
0
possibly |-ed with "IS_NUMBER_TRAILING".
If an infinity or a not-a-number is recognized, *sp will point
to one byte past the end of the recognized string. If the
recognition fails, zero is returned, and *sp will not move.
int grok_infnan(const char** sp, const char *send)
grok_number
Identical to "grok_number_flags()" with "flags" set to zero.
int grok_number(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
UV *valuep)
grok_number_flags
Recognise (or not) a number. The type of the number is
returned (0 if unrecognised), otherwise it is a bit-ORed
combination of "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV",
"IS_NUMBER_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX", "IS_NUMBER_NOT_INT",
"IS_NUMBER_NEG", "IS_NUMBER_INFINITY", "IS_NUMBER_NAN" (defined
in perl.h).
If the value of the number can fit in a UV, it is returned in
*valuep. "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV" will be set to indicate that
*valuep is valid, "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV" will never be set unless
*valuep is valid, but *valuep may have been assigned to during
processing even though "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV" is not set on return.
If "valuep" is "NULL", "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV" will be set for the
same cases as when "valuep" is non-"NULL", but no actual
assignment (or SEGV) will occur.
"IS_NUMBER_NOT_INT" will be set with "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV" if
trailing decimals were seen (in which case *valuep gives the
true value truncated to an integer), and "IS_NUMBER_NEG" if the
number is negative (in which case *valuep holds the absolute
value). "IS_NUMBER_IN_UV" is not set if e notation was used or
the number is larger than a UV.
"flags" allows only "PERL_SCAN_TRAILING", which allows for
trailing non-numeric text on an otherwise successful grok,
setting "IS_NUMBER_TRAILING" on the result.
int grok_number_flags(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
UV *valuep, U32 flags)
grok_numeric_radix
Scan and skip for a numeric decimal separator (radix).
bool grok_numeric_radix(const char **sp,
const char *send)
grok_oct
converts a string representing an octal number to numeric form.
On entry "start" and *len give the string to scan, *flags gives
conversion flags, and "result" should be "NULL" or a pointer to
an NV. The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first
invalid character. Unless "PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT" is set
in *flags, encountering an 8 or 9 will also trigger a warning.
On return *len is set to the length of the scanned string, and
*flags gives output flags.
If the value is <= "UV_MAX" it is returned as a UV, the output
flags are clear, and nothing is written to *result. If the
value is > "UV_MAX", "grok_oct" returns "UV_MAX", sets
"PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX" in the output flags, and writes
the value to *result (or the value is discarded if "result" is
"NULL").
If "PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES" is set in *flags then the
octal number may use "_" characters to separate digits.
UV grok_oct(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
I32* flags, NV *result)
isinfnan
"Perl_isinfnan()" is utility function that returns true if the
NV argument is either an infinity or a "NaN", false otherwise.
To test in more detail, use "Perl_isinf()" and "Perl_isnan()".
This is also the logical inverse of Perl_isfinite().
bool isinfnan(NV nv)
Perl_signbit
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Return a non-zero integer if the sign bit on an NV is set, and
0 if it is not.
If Configure detects this system has a "signbit()" that will
work with our NVs, then we just use it via the "#define" in
perl.h. Otherwise, fall back on this implementation. The main
use of this function is catching "-0.0".
"Configure" notes: This function is called 'Perl_signbit'
instead of a plain 'signbit' because it is easy to imagine a
system having a "signbit()" function or macro that doesn't
happen to work with our particular choice of NVs. We shouldn't
just re-"#define" "signbit" as "Perl_signbit" and expect the
standard system headers to be happy. Also, this is a no-
context function (no "pTHX_") because "Perl_signbit()" is
usually re-"#defined" in perl.h as a simple macro call to the
system's "signbit()". Users should just always call
"Perl_signbit()".
int Perl_signbit(NV f)
scan_bin
For backwards compatibility. Use "grok_bin" instead.
NV scan_bin(const char* start, STRLEN len,
STRLEN* retlen)
scan_hex
For backwards compatibility. Use "grok_hex" instead.
NV scan_hex(const char* start, STRLEN len,
STRLEN* retlen)
scan_oct
For backwards compatibility. Use "grok_oct" instead.
NV scan_oct(const char* start, STRLEN len,
STRLEN* retlen)
Obsolete backwards compatibility functions
Some of these are also deprecated. You can exclude these from your
compiled Perl by adding this option to Configure:
"-Accflags='-DNO_MATHOMS'"
custom_op_desc
Return the description of a given custom op. This was once
used by the "OP_DESC" macro, but is no longer: it has only been
kept for compatibility, and should not be used.
const char * custom_op_desc(const OP *o)
custom_op_name
Return the name for a given custom op. This was once used by
the "OP_NAME" macro, but is no longer: it has only been kept
for compatibility, and should not be used.
const char * custom_op_name(const OP *o)
gv_fetchmethod
See "gv_fetchmethod_autoload".
GV* gv_fetchmethod(HV* stash, const char* name)
is_utf8_char
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Tests if some arbitrary number of bytes begins in a valid UTF-8
character. Note that an INVARIANT (i.e. ASCII on non-EBCDIC
machines) character is a valid UTF-8 character. The actual
number of bytes in the UTF-8 character will be returned if it
is valid, otherwise 0.
This function is deprecated due to the possibility that
malformed input could cause reading beyond the end of the input
buffer. Use "isUTF8_CHAR" instead.
STRLEN is_utf8_char(const U8 *s)
is_utf8_char_buf
This is identical to the macro "isUTF8_CHAR".
STRLEN is_utf8_char_buf(const U8 *buf,
const U8 *buf_end)
pack_cat
The engine implementing "pack()" Perl function. Note:
parameters "next_in_list" and "flags" are not used. This call
should not be used; use "packlist" instead.
void pack_cat(SV *cat, const char *pat,
const char *patend, SV **beglist,
SV **endlist, SV ***next_in_list,
U32 flags)
pad_compname_type
Looks up the type of the lexical variable at position "po" in
the currently-compiling pad. If the variable is typed, the
stash of the class to which it is typed is returned. If not,
"NULL" is returned.
HV * pad_compname_type(PADOFFSET po)
sv_2pvbyte_nolen
Return a pointer to the byte-encoded representation of the SV.
May cause the SV to be downgraded from UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the "SvPVbyte_nolen" macro.
char* sv_2pvbyte_nolen(SV* sv)
sv_2pvutf8_nolen
Return a pointer to the UTF-8-encoded representation of the SV.
May cause the SV to be upgraded to UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the "SvPVutf8_nolen" macro.
char* sv_2pvutf8_nolen(SV* sv)
sv_2pv_nolen
Like "sv_2pv()", but doesn't return the length too. You should
usually use the macro wrapper "SvPV_nolen(sv)" instead.
char* sv_2pv_nolen(SV* sv)
sv_catpvn_mg
Like "sv_catpvn", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_catpvn_mg(SV *sv, const char *ptr,
STRLEN len)
sv_catsv_mg
Like "sv_catsv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_catsv_mg(SV *dsv, SV *ssv)
sv_force_normal
Undo various types of fakery on an SV: if the PV is a shared
string, make a private copy; if we're a ref, stop refing; if
we're a glob, downgrade to an "xpvmg". See also
"sv_force_normal_flags".
void sv_force_normal(SV *sv)
sv_iv A private implementation of the "SvIVx" macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use
the macro instead.
IV sv_iv(SV* sv)
sv_nolocking
Dummy routine which "locks" an SV when there is no locking
module present. Exists to avoid test for a "NULL" function
pointer and because it could potentially warn under some level
of strict-ness.
"Superseded" by "sv_nosharing()".
void sv_nolocking(SV *sv)
sv_nounlocking
Dummy routine which "unlocks" an SV when there is no locking
module present. Exists to avoid test for a "NULL" function
pointer and because it could potentially warn under some level
of strict-ness.
"Superseded" by "sv_nosharing()".
void sv_nounlocking(SV *sv)
sv_nv A private implementation of the "SvNVx" macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use
the macro instead.
NV sv_nv(SV* sv)
sv_pv Use the "SvPV_nolen" macro instead
char* sv_pv(SV *sv)
sv_pvbyte
Use "SvPVbyte_nolen" instead.
char* sv_pvbyte(SV *sv)
sv_pvbyten
A private implementation of the "SvPVbyte" macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use
the macro instead.
char* sv_pvbyten(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)
sv_pvn A private implementation of the "SvPV" macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use
the macro instead.
char* sv_pvn(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)
sv_pvutf8
Use the "SvPVutf8_nolen" macro instead
char* sv_pvutf8(SV *sv)
sv_pvutf8n
A private implementation of the "SvPVutf8" macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use
the macro instead.
char* sv_pvutf8n(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)
sv_taint
Taint an SV. Use "SvTAINTED_on" instead.
void sv_taint(SV* sv)
sv_unref
Unsets the RV status of the SV, and decrements the reference
count of whatever was being referenced by the RV. This can
almost be thought of as a reversal of "newSVrv". This is
"sv_unref_flags" with the "flag" being zero. See "SvROK_off".
void sv_unref(SV* sv)
sv_usepvn
Tells an SV to use "ptr" to find its string value. Implemented
by calling "sv_usepvn_flags" with "flags" of 0, hence does not
handle 'set' magic. See "sv_usepvn_flags".
void sv_usepvn(SV* sv, char* ptr, STRLEN len)
sv_usepvn_mg
Like "sv_usepvn", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_usepvn_mg(SV *sv, char *ptr, STRLEN len)
sv_uv A private implementation of the "SvUVx" macro for compilers
which can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use
the macro instead.
UV sv_uv(SV* sv)
unpack_str
The engine implementing "unpack()" Perl function. Note:
parameters "strbeg", "new_s" and "ocnt" are not used. This
call should not be used, use "unpackstring" instead.
I32 unpack_str(const char *pat, const char *patend,
const char *s, const char *strbeg,
const char *strend, char **new_s,
I32 ocnt, U32 flags)
utf8_to_uvchr
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Returns the native code point of the first character in the
string "s" which is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; "retlen"
will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.
Some, but not all, UTF-8 malformations are detected, and in
fact, some malformed input could cause reading beyond the end
of the input buffer, which is why this function is deprecated.
Use "utf8_to_uvchr_buf" instead.
If "s" points to one of the detected malformations, and UTF8
warnings are enabled, zero is returned and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" isn't "NULL") to -1. If those warnings are off, the
computed value if well-defined (or the Unicode REPLACEMENT
CHARACTER, if not) is silently returned, and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" isn't NULL) so that ("s"+*retlen) is the next
possible position in "s" that could begin a non-malformed
character. See "utf8n_to_uvchr" for details on when the
REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
UV utf8_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)
utf8_to_uvuni
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Returns the Unicode code point of the first character in the
string "s" which is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; "retlen"
will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.
Some, but not all, UTF-8 malformations are detected, and in
fact, some malformed input could cause reading beyond the end
of the input buffer, which is one reason why this function is
deprecated. The other is that only in extremely limited
circumstances should the Unicode versus native code point be of
any interest to you. See "utf8_to_uvuni_buf" for alternatives.
If "s" points to one of the detected malformations, and UTF8
warnings are enabled, zero is returned and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" doesn't point to NULL) to -1. If those warnings are
off, the computed value if well-defined (or the Unicode
REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, if not) is silently returned, and
*retlen is set (if "retlen" isn't NULL) so that ("s"+*retlen)
is the next possible position in "s" that could begin a non-
malformed character. See "utf8n_to_uvchr" for details on when
the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
UV utf8_to_uvuni(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)
Optree construction
newASSIGNOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an assignment op. "left" and
"right" supply the parameters of the assignment; they are
consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op
tree.
If "optype" is "OP_ANDASSIGN", "OP_ORASSIGN", or
"OP_DORASSIGN", then a suitable conditional optree is
constructed. If "optype" is the opcode of a binary operator,
such as "OP_BIT_OR", then an op is constructed that performs
the binary operation and assigns the result to the left
argument. Either way, if "optype" is non-zero then "flags" has
no effect.
If "optype" is zero, then a plain scalar or list assignment is
constructed. Which type of assignment it is is automatically
determined. "flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags", except
that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted up
eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private", except that the bit
with value 1 or 2 is automatically set as required.
OP * newASSIGNOP(I32 flags, OP *left, I32 optype,
OP *right)
newBINOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any binary type.
"type" is the opcode. "flags" gives the eight bits of
"op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically,
and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private",
except that the bit with value 1 or 2 is automatically set as
required. "first" and "last" supply up to two ops to be the
direct children of the binary op; they are consumed by this
function and become part of the constructed op tree.
OP * newBINOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
OP *last)
newCONDOP
Constructs, checks, and returns a conditional-expression
("cond_expr") op. "flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags",
except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted
up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private", except that the
bit with value 1 is automatically set. "first" supplies the
expression selecting between the two branches, and "trueop" and
"falseop" supply the branches; they are consumed by this
function and become part of the constructed op tree.
OP * newCONDOP(I32 flags, OP *first, OP *trueop,
OP *falseop)
newDEFSVOP
Constructs and returns an op to access $_.
OP * newDEFSVOP()
newFOROP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a
"foreach" loop (iteration through a list of values). This is a
heavyweight loop, with structure that allows exiting the loop
by "last" and suchlike.
"sv" optionally supplies the variable that will be aliased to
each item in turn; if null, it defaults to $_. "expr" supplies
the list of values to iterate over. "block" supplies the main
body of the loop, and "cont" optionally supplies a "continue"
block that operates as a second half of the body. All of these
optree inputs are consumed by this function and become part of
the constructed op tree.
"flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags" for the "leaveloop"
op and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private"
for the "leaveloop" op, except that (in both cases) some bits
will be set automatically.
OP * newFOROP(I32 flags, OP *sv, OP *expr, OP *block,
OP *cont)
newGIVENOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a "given"
block. "cond" supplies the expression that will be locally
assigned to a lexical variable, and "block" supplies the body
of the "given" construct; they are consumed by this function
and become part of the constructed op tree. "defsv_off" must
be zero (it used to identity the pad slot of lexical $_).
OP * newGIVENOP(OP *cond, OP *block,
PADOFFSET defsv_off)
newGVOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves
an embedded reference to a GV. "type" is the opcode. "flags"
gives the eight bits of "op_flags". "gv" identifies the GV
that the op should reference; calling this function does not
transfer ownership of any reference to it.
OP * newGVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, GV *gv)
newLISTOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any list type. "type"
is the opcode. "flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags",
except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically if required.
"first" and "last" supply up to two ops to be direct children
of the list op; they are consumed by this function and become
part of the constructed op tree.
For most list operators, the check function expects all the kid
ops to be present already, so calling "newLISTOP(OP_JOIN, ...)"
(e.g.) is not appropriate. What you want to do in that case is
create an op of type "OP_LIST", append more children to it, and
then call "op_convert_list". See "op_convert_list" for more
information.
OP * newLISTOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
OP *last)
newLOGOP
Constructs, checks, and returns a logical (flow control) op.
"type" is the opcode. "flags" gives the eight bits of
"op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically,
and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private",
except that the bit with value 1 is automatically set. "first"
supplies the expression controlling the flow, and "other"
supplies the side (alternate) chain of ops; they are consumed
by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.
OP * newLOGOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
OP *other)
newLOOPEX
Constructs, checks, and returns a loop-exiting op (such as
"goto" or "last"). "type" is the opcode. "label" supplies the
parameter determining the target of the op; it is consumed by
this function and becomes part of the constructed op tree.
OP * newLOOPEX(I32 type, OP *label)
newLOOPOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a loop.
This is only a loop in the control flow through the op tree; it
does not have the heavyweight loop structure that allows
exiting the loop by "last" and suchlike. "flags" gives the
eight bits of "op_flags" for the top-level op, except that some
bits will be set automatically as required. "expr" supplies
the expression controlling loop iteration, and "block" supplies
the body of the loop; they are consumed by this function and
become part of the constructed op tree. "debuggable" is
currently unused and should always be 1.
OP * newLOOPOP(I32 flags, I32 debuggable, OP *expr,
OP *block)
newMETHOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of method type with a
method name evaluated at runtime. "type" is the opcode.
"flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags", except that
"OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight
bits, the eight bits of "op_private", except that the bit with
value 1 is automatically set. "dynamic_meth" supplies an op
which evaluates method name; it is consumed by this function
and become part of the constructed op tree. Supported optypes:
"OP_METHOD".
OP * newMETHOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first)
newMETHOP_named
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of method type with a
constant method name. "type" is the opcode. "flags" gives the
eight bits of "op_flags", and, shifted up eight bits, the eight
bits of "op_private". "const_meth" supplies a constant method
name; it must be a shared COW string. Supported optypes:
"OP_METHOD_NAMED".
OP * newMETHOP_named(I32 type, I32 flags,
SV *const_meth)
newNULLLIST
Constructs, checks, and returns a new "stub" op, which
represents an empty list expression.
OP * newNULLLIST()
newOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any base type (any
type that has no extra fields). "type" is the opcode. "flags"
gives the eight bits of "op_flags", and, shifted up eight bits,
the eight bits of "op_private".
OP * newOP(I32 type, I32 flags)
newPADOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves
a reference to a pad element. "type" is the opcode. "flags"
gives the eight bits of "op_flags". A pad slot is
automatically allocated, and is populated with "sv"; this
function takes ownership of one reference to it.
This function only exists if Perl has been compiled to use
ithreads.
OP * newPADOP(I32 type, I32 flags, SV *sv)
newPMOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any pattern matching
type. "type" is the opcode. "flags" gives the eight bits of
"op_flags" and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
"op_private".
OP * newPMOP(I32 type, I32 flags)
newPVOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves
an embedded C-level pointer (PV). "type" is the opcode.
"flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags". "pv" supplies the
C-level pointer, which must have been allocated using
"PerlMemShared_malloc"; the memory will be freed when the op is
destroyed.
OP * newPVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, char *pv)
newRANGE
Constructs and returns a "range" op, with subordinate "flip"
and "flop" ops. "flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags" for
the "flip" op and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
"op_private" for both the "flip" and "range" ops, except that
the bit with value 1 is automatically set. "left" and "right"
supply the expressions controlling the endpoints of the range;
they are consumed by this function and become part of the
constructed op tree.
OP * newRANGE(I32 flags, OP *left, OP *right)
newSLICEOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an "lslice" (list slice) op.
"flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags", except that
"OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight
bits, the eight bits of "op_private", except that the bit with
value 1 or 2 is automatically set as required. "listval" and
"subscript" supply the parameters of the slice; they are
consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op
tree.
OP * newSLICEOP(I32 flags, OP *subscript,
OP *listval)
newSTATEOP
Constructs a state op (COP). The state op is normally a
"nextstate" op, but will be a "dbstate" op if debugging is
enabled for currently-compiled code. The state op is populated
from "PL_curcop" (or "PL_compiling"). If "label" is non-null,
it supplies the name of a label to attach to the state op; this
function takes ownership of the memory pointed at by "label",
and will free it. "flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags"
for the state op.
If "o" is null, the state op is returned. Otherwise the state
op is combined with "o" into a "lineseq" list op, which is
returned. "o" is consumed by this function and becomes part of
the returned op tree.
OP * newSTATEOP(I32 flags, char *label, OP *o)
newSVOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves
an embedded SV. "type" is the opcode. "flags" gives the eight
bits of "op_flags". "sv" gives the SV to embed in the op; this
function takes ownership of one reference to it.
OP * newSVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, SV *sv)
newUNOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any unary type.
"type" is the opcode. "flags" gives the eight bits of
"op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically if
required, and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
"op_private", except that the bit with value 1 is automatically
set. "first" supplies an optional op to be the direct child of
the unary op; it is consumed by this function and become part
of the constructed op tree.
OP * newUNOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first)
newUNOP_AUX
Similar to "newUNOP", but creates an "UNOP_AUX" struct instead,
with "op_aux" initialised to "aux"
OP* newUNOP_AUX(I32 type, I32 flags, OP* first,
UNOP_AUX_item *aux)
newWHENOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a "when"
block. "cond" supplies the test expression, and "block"
supplies the block that will be executed if the test evaluates
to true; they are consumed by this function and become part of
the constructed op tree. "cond" will be interpreted
DWIMically, often as a comparison against $_, and may be null
to generate a "default" block.
OP * newWHENOP(OP *cond, OP *block)
newWHILEOP
Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a "while"
loop. This is a heavyweight loop, with structure that allows
exiting the loop by "last" and suchlike.
"loop" is an optional preconstructed "enterloop" op to use in
the loop; if it is null then a suitable op will be constructed
automatically. "expr" supplies the loop's controlling
expression. "block" supplies the main body of the loop, and
"cont" optionally supplies a "continue" block that operates as
a second half of the body. All of these optree inputs are
consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op
tree.
"flags" gives the eight bits of "op_flags" for the "leaveloop"
op and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private"
for the "leaveloop" op, except that (in both cases) some bits
will be set automatically. "debuggable" is currently unused
and should always be 1. "has_my" can be supplied as true to
force the loop body to be enclosed in its own scope.
OP * newWHILEOP(I32 flags, I32 debuggable,
LOOP *loop, OP *expr, OP *block,
OP *cont, I32 has_my)
Optree Manipulation Functions
alloccopstash
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Available only under threaded builds, this function allocates
an entry in "PL_stashpad" for the stash passed to it.
PADOFFSET alloccopstash(HV *hv)
block_end
Handles compile-time scope exit. "floor" is the savestack
index returned by "block_start", and "seq" is the body of the
block. Returns the block, possibly modified.
OP * block_end(I32 floor, OP *seq)
block_start
Handles compile-time scope entry. Arranges for hints to be
restored on block exit and also handles pad sequence numbers to
make lexical variables scope right. Returns a savestack index
for use with "block_end".
int block_start(int full)
ck_entersub_args_list
Performs the default fixup of the arguments part of an
"entersub" op tree. This consists of applying list context to
each of the argument ops. This is the standard treatment used
on a call marked with "&", or a method call, or a call through
a subroutine reference, or any other call where the callee
can't be identified at compile time, or a call where the callee
has no prototype.
OP * ck_entersub_args_list(OP *entersubop)
ck_entersub_args_proto
Performs the fixup of the arguments part of an "entersub" op
tree based on a subroutine prototype. This makes various
modifications to the argument ops, from applying context up to
inserting "refgen" ops, and checking the number and syntactic
types of arguments, as directed by the prototype. This is the
standard treatment used on a subroutine call, not marked with
"&", where the callee can be identified at compile time and has
a prototype.
"protosv" supplies the subroutine prototype to be applied to
the call. It may be a normal defined scalar, of which the
string value will be used. Alternatively, for convenience, it
may be a subroutine object (a "CV*" that has been cast to
"SV*") which has a prototype. The prototype supplied, in
whichever form, does not need to match the actual callee
referenced by the op tree.
If the argument ops disagree with the prototype, for example by
having an unacceptable number of arguments, a valid op tree is
returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state,
normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of
parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.
In the error message, the callee is referred to by the name
defined by the "namegv" parameter.
OP * ck_entersub_args_proto(OP *entersubop,
GV *namegv, SV *protosv)
ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list
Performs the fixup of the arguments part of an "entersub" op
tree either based on a subroutine prototype or using default
list-context processing. This is the standard treatment used
on a subroutine call, not marked with "&", where the callee can
be identified at compile time.
"protosv" supplies the subroutine prototype to be applied to
the call, or indicates that there is no prototype. It may be a
normal scalar, in which case if it is defined then the string
value will be used as a prototype, and if it is undefined then
there is no prototype. Alternatively, for convenience, it may
be a subroutine object (a "CV*" that has been cast to "SV*"),
of which the prototype will be used if it has one. The
prototype (or lack thereof) supplied, in whichever form, does
not need to match the actual callee referenced by the op tree.
If the argument ops disagree with the prototype, for example by
having an unacceptable number of arguments, a valid op tree is
returned anyway. The error is reflected in the parser state,
normally resulting in a single exception at the top level of
parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.
In the error message, the callee is referred to by the name
defined by the "namegv" parameter.
OP * ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list(OP *entersubop,
GV *namegv,
SV *protosv)
cv_const_sv
If "cv" is a constant sub eligible for inlining, returns the
constant value returned by the sub. Otherwise, returns "NULL".
Constant subs can be created with "newCONSTSUB" or as described
in "Constant Functions" in perlsub.
SV* cv_const_sv(const CV *const cv)
cv_get_call_checker
Retrieves the function that will be used to fix up a call to
"cv". Specifically, the function is applied to an "entersub"
op tree for a subroutine call, not marked with "&", where the
callee can be identified at compile time as "cv".
The C-level function pointer is returned in *ckfun_p, and an SV
argument for it is returned in *ckobj_p. The function is
intended to be called in this manner:
entersubop = (*ckfun_p)(aTHX_ entersubop, namegv, (*ckobj_p));
In this call, "entersubop" is a pointer to the "entersub" op,
which may be replaced by the check function, and "namegv" is a
GV supplying the name that should be used by the check function
to refer to the callee of the "entersub" op if it needs to emit
any diagnostics. It is permitted to apply the check function
in non-standard situations, such as to a call to a different
subroutine or to a method call.
By default, the function is
Perl_ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list, and the SV parameter is
"cv" itself. This implements standard prototype processing.
It can be changed, for a particular subroutine, by
"cv_set_call_checker".
void cv_get_call_checker(CV *cv,
Perl_call_checker *ckfun_p,
SV **ckobj_p)
cv_set_call_checker
The original form of "cv_set_call_checker_flags", which passes
it the "CALL_CHECKER_REQUIRE_GV" flag for backward-
compatibility.
void cv_set_call_checker(CV *cv,
Perl_call_checker ckfun,
SV *ckobj)
cv_set_call_checker_flags
Sets the function that will be used to fix up a call to "cv".
Specifically, the function is applied to an "entersub" op tree
for a subroutine call, not marked with "&", where the callee
can be identified at compile time as "cv".
The C-level function pointer is supplied in "ckfun", and an SV
argument for it is supplied in "ckobj". The function should be
defined like this:
STATIC OP * ckfun(pTHX_ OP *op, GV *namegv, SV *ckobj)
It is intended to be called in this manner:
entersubop = ckfun(aTHX_ entersubop, namegv, ckobj);
In this call, "entersubop" is a pointer to the "entersub" op,
which may be replaced by the check function, and "namegv"
supplies the name that should be used by the check function to
refer to the callee of the "entersub" op if it needs to emit
any diagnostics. It is permitted to apply the check function
in non-standard situations, such as to a call to a different
subroutine or to a method call.
"namegv" may not actually be a GV. For efficiency, perl may
pass a CV or other SV instead. Whatever is passed can be used
as the first argument to "cv_name". You can force perl to pass
a GV by including "CALL_CHECKER_REQUIRE_GV" in the "flags".
The current setting for a particular CV can be retrieved by
"cv_get_call_checker".
void cv_set_call_checker_flags(
CV *cv, Perl_call_checker ckfun, SV *ckobj,
U32 flags
)
LINKLIST
Given the root of an optree, link the tree in execution order
using the "op_next" pointers and return the first op executed.
If this has already been done, it will not be redone, and
"o->op_next" will be returned. If "o->op_next" is not already
set, "o" should be at least an "UNOP".
OP* LINKLIST(OP *o)
newCONSTSUB
See "newCONSTSUB_flags".
CV* newCONSTSUB(HV* stash, const char* name, SV* sv)
newCONSTSUB_flags
Creates a constant sub equivalent to Perl "subFOO(){123}"
which is eligible for inlining at compile-time.
Currently, the only useful value for "flags" is "SVf_UTF8".
The newly created subroutine takes ownership of a reference to
the passed in SV.
Passing "NULL" for SV creates a constant sub equivalent to
"subBAR(){}", which won't be called if used as a destructor,
but will suppress the overhead of a call to "AUTOLOAD". (This
form, however, isn't eligible for inlining at compile time.)
CV* newCONSTSUB_flags(HV* stash, const char* name,
STRLEN len, U32 flags, SV* sv)
newXS Used by "xsubpp" to hook up XSUBs as Perl subs. "filename"
needs to be static storage, as it is used directly as CvFILE(),
without a copy being made.
op_append_elem
Append an item to the list of ops contained directly within a
list-type op, returning the lengthened list. "first" is the
list-type op, and "last" is the op to append to the list.
"optype" specifies the intended opcode for the list. If
"first" is not already a list of the right type, it will be
upgraded into one. If either "first" or "last" is null, the
other is returned unchanged.
OP * op_append_elem(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)
op_append_list
Concatenate the lists of ops contained directly within two
list-type ops, returning the combined list. "first" and "last"
are the list-type ops to concatenate. "optype" specifies the
intended opcode for the list. If either "first" or "last" is
not already a list of the right type, it will be upgraded into
one. If either "first" or "last" is null, the other is
returned unchanged.
OP * op_append_list(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)
OP_CLASS
Return the class of the provided OP: that is, which of the *OP
structures it uses. For core ops this currently gets the
information out of "PL_opargs", which does not always
accurately reflect the type used. For custom ops the type is
returned from the registration, and it is up to the registree
to ensure it is accurate. The value returned will be one of
the "OA_"* constants from op.h.
U32 OP_CLASS(OP *o)
op_contextualize
Applies a syntactic context to an op tree representing an
expression. "o" is the op tree, and "context" must be
"G_SCALAR", "G_ARRAY", or "G_VOID" to specify the context to
apply. The modified op tree is returned.
OP * op_contextualize(OP *o, I32 context)
op_convert_list
Converts "o" into a list op if it is not one already, and then
converts it into the specified "type", calling its check
function, allocating a target if it needs one, and folding
constants.
A list-type op is usually constructed one kid at a time via
"newLISTOP", "op_prepend_elem" and "op_append_elem". Then
finally it is passed to "op_convert_list" to make it the right
type.
OP * op_convert_list(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *o)
OP_DESC Return a short description of the provided OP.
const char * OP_DESC(OP *o)
op_free Free an op. Only use this when an op is no longer linked to
from any optree.
void op_free(OP *o)
OpHAS_SIBLING
Returns true if "o" has a sibling
bool OpHAS_SIBLING(OP *o)
OpLASTSIB_set
Marks "o" as having no further siblings. On "PERL_OP_PARENT"
builds, marks o as having the specified parent. See also
"OpMORESIB_set" and "OpMAYBESIB_set". For a higher-level
interface, see "op_sibling_splice".
void OpLASTSIB_set(OP *o, OP *parent)
op_linklist
This function is the implementation of the "LINKLIST" macro.
It should not be called directly.
OP* op_linklist(OP *o)
op_lvalue
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Propagate lvalue ("modifiable") context to an op and its
children. "type" represents the context type, roughly based on
the type of op that would do the modifying, although "local()"
is represented by "OP_NULL", because it has no op type of its
own (it is signalled by a flag on the lvalue op).
This function detects things that can't be modified, such as
"$x+1", and generates errors for them. For example, "$x+1 = 2"
would cause it to be called with an op of type "OP_ADD" and a
"type" argument of "OP_SASSIGN".
It also flags things that need to behave specially in an lvalue
context, such as "$$x = 5" which might have to vivify a
reference in $x.
OP * op_lvalue(OP *o, I32 type)
OpMAYBESIB_set
Conditionally does "OpMORESIB_set" or "OpLASTSIB_set" depending
on whether "sib" is non-null. For a higher-level interface, see
"op_sibling_splice".
void OpMAYBESIB_set(OP *o, OP *sib, OP *parent)
OpMORESIB_set
Sets the sibling of "o" to the non-zero value "sib". See also
"OpLASTSIB_set" and "OpMAYBESIB_set". For a higher-level
interface, see "op_sibling_splice".
void OpMORESIB_set(OP *o, OP *sib)
OP_NAME Return the name of the provided OP. For core ops this looks up
the name from the op_type; for custom ops from the op_ppaddr.
const char * OP_NAME(OP *o)
op_null Neutralizes an op when it is no longer needed, but is still
linked to from other ops.
void op_null(OP *o)
op_parent
Returns the parent OP of "o", if it has a parent. Returns
"NULL" otherwise. This function is only available on perls
built with "-DPERL_OP_PARENT".
OP* op_parent(OP *o)
op_prepend_elem
Prepend an item to the list of ops contained directly within a
list-type op, returning the lengthened list. "first" is the op
to prepend to the list, and "last" is the list-type op.
"optype" specifies the intended opcode for the list. If "last"
is not already a list of the right type, it will be upgraded
into one. If either "first" or "last" is null, the other is
returned unchanged.
OP * op_prepend_elem(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)
op_scope
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Wraps up an op tree with some additional ops so that at runtime
a dynamic scope will be created. The original ops run in the
new dynamic scope, and then, provided that they exit normally,
the scope will be unwound. The additional ops used to create
and unwind the dynamic scope will normally be an
"enter"/"leave" pair, but a "scope" op may be used instead if
the ops are simple enough to not need the full dynamic scope
structure.
OP * op_scope(OP *o)
OpSIBLING
Returns the sibling of "o", or "NULL" if there is no sibling
OP* OpSIBLING(OP *o)
op_sibling_splice
A general function for editing the structure of an existing
chain of op_sibling nodes. By analogy with the perl-level
"splice()" function, allows you to delete zero or more
sequential nodes, replacing them with zero or more different
nodes. Performs the necessary op_first/op_last housekeeping on
the parent node and op_sibling manipulation on the children.
The last deleted node will be marked as as the last node by
updating the op_sibling/op_sibparent or op_moresib field as
appropriate.
Note that op_next is not manipulated, and nodes are not freed;
that is the responsibility of the caller. It also won't create
a new list op for an empty list etc; use higher-level functions
like op_append_elem() for that.
"parent" is the parent node of the sibling chain. It may passed
as "NULL" if the splicing doesn't affect the first or last op
in the chain.
"start" is the node preceding the first node to be spliced.
Node(s) following it will be deleted, and ops will be inserted
after it. If it is "NULL", the first node onwards is deleted,
and nodes are inserted at the beginning.
"del_count" is the number of nodes to delete. If zero, no
nodes are deleted. If -1 or greater than or equal to the
number of remaining kids, all remaining kids are deleted.
"insert" is the first of a chain of nodes to be inserted in
place of the nodes. If "NULL", no nodes are inserted.
The head of the chain of deleted ops is returned, or "NULL" if
no ops were deleted.
For example:
action before after returns
------ ----- ----- -------
P P
splice(P, A, 2, X-Y-Z) | | B-C
A-B-C-D A-X-Y-Z-D
P P
splice(P, NULL, 1, X-Y) | | A
A-B-C-D X-Y-B-C-D
P P
splice(P, NULL, 3, NULL) | | A-B-C
A-B-C-D D
P P
splice(P, B, 0, X-Y) | | NULL
A-B-C-D A-B-X-Y-C-D
For lower-level direct manipulation of "op_sibparent" and
"op_moresib", see "OpMORESIB_set", "OpLASTSIB_set",
"OpMAYBESIB_set".
OP* op_sibling_splice(OP *parent, OP *start,
int del_count, OP* insert)
OP_TYPE_IS
Returns true if the given OP is not a "NULL" pointer and if it
is of the given type.
The negation of this macro, "OP_TYPE_ISNT" is also available as
well as "OP_TYPE_IS_NN" and "OP_TYPE_ISNT_NN" which elide the
NULL pointer check.
bool OP_TYPE_IS(OP *o, Optype type)
OP_TYPE_IS_OR_WAS
Returns true if the given OP is not a NULL pointer and if it is
of the given type or used to be before being replaced by an OP
of type OP_NULL.
The negation of this macro, "OP_TYPE_ISNT_AND_WASNT" is also
available as well as "OP_TYPE_IS_OR_WAS_NN" and
"OP_TYPE_ISNT_AND_WASNT_NN" which elide the "NULL" pointer
check.
bool OP_TYPE_IS_OR_WAS(OP *o, Optype type)
rv2cv_op_cv
Examines an op, which is expected to identify a subroutine at
runtime, and attempts to determine at compile time which
subroutine it identifies. This is normally used during Perl
compilation to determine whether a prototype can be applied to
a function call. "cvop" is the op being considered, normally
an "rv2cv" op. A pointer to the identified subroutine is
returned, if it could be determined statically, and a null
pointer is returned if it was not possible to determine
statically.
Currently, the subroutine can be identified statically if the
RV that the "rv2cv" is to operate on is provided by a suitable
"gv" or "const" op. A "gv" op is suitable if the GV's CV slot
is populated. A "const" op is suitable if the constant value
must be an RV pointing to a CV. Details of this process may
change in future versions of Perl. If the "rv2cv" op has the
"OPpENTERSUB_AMPER" flag set then no attempt is made to
identify the subroutine statically: this flag is used to
suppress compile-time magic on a subroutine call, forcing it to
use default runtime behaviour.
If "flags" has the bit "RV2CVOPCV_MARK_EARLY" set, then the
handling of a GV reference is modified. If a GV was examined
and its CV slot was found to be empty, then the "gv" op has the
"OPpEARLY_CV" flag set. If the op is not optimised away, and
the CV slot is later populated with a subroutine having a
prototype, that flag eventually triggers the warning "called
too early to check prototype".
If "flags" has the bit "RV2CVOPCV_RETURN_NAME_GV" set, then
instead of returning a pointer to the subroutine it returns a
pointer to the GV giving the most appropriate name for the
subroutine in this context. Normally this is just the "CvGV"
of the subroutine, but for an anonymous ("CvANON") subroutine
that is referenced through a GV it will be the referencing GV.
The resulting "GV*" is cast to "CV*" to be returned. A null
pointer is returned as usual if there is no statically-
determinable subroutine.
CV * rv2cv_op_cv(OP *cvop, U32 flags)
Pack and Unpack
packlist
The engine implementing "pack()" Perl function.
void packlist(SV *cat, const char *pat,
const char *patend, SV **beglist,
SV **endlist)
unpackstring
The engine implementing the "unpack()" Perl function.
Using the template "pat..patend", this function unpacks the
string "s..strend" into a number of mortal SVs, which it pushes
onto the perl argument (@_) stack (so you will need to issue a
"PUTBACK" before and "SPAGAIN" after the call to this
function). It returns the number of pushed elements.
The "strend" and "patend" pointers should point to the byte
following the last character of each string.
Although this function returns its values on the perl argument
stack, it doesn't take any parameters from that stack (and thus
in particular there's no need to do a "PUSHMARK" before calling
it, unlike "call_pv" for example).
I32 unpackstring(const char *pat,
const char *patend, const char *s,
const char *strend, U32 flags)
Pad Data Structures
CvPADLIST
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
CV's can have CvPADLIST(cv) set to point to a PADLIST. This is
the CV's scratchpad, which stores lexical variables and opcode
temporary and per-thread values.
For these purposes "formats" are a kind-of CV; eval""s are too
(except they're not callable at will and are always thrown away
after the eval"" is done executing). Require'd files are
simply evals without any outer lexical scope.
XSUBs do not have a "CvPADLIST". "dXSTARG" fetches values from
"PL_curpad", but that is really the callers pad (a slot of
which is allocated by every entersub). Do not get or set
"CvPADLIST" if a CV is an XSUB (as determined by "CvISXSUB()"),
"CvPADLIST" slot is reused for a different internal purpose in
XSUBs.
The PADLIST has a C array where pads are stored.
The 0th entry of the PADLIST is a PADNAMELIST which represents
the "names" or rather the "static type information" for
lexicals. The individual elements of a PADNAMELIST are
PADNAMEs. Future refactorings might stop the PADNAMELIST from
being stored in the PADLIST's array, so don't rely on it. See
"PadlistNAMES".
The CvDEPTH'th entry of a PADLIST is a PAD (an AV) which is the
stack frame at that depth of recursion into the CV. The 0th
slot of a frame AV is an AV which is @_. Other entries are
storage for variables and op targets.
Iterating over the PADNAMELIST iterates over all possible pad
items. Pad slots for targets ("SVs_PADTMP") and GVs end up
having &PL_padname_undef "names", while slots for constants
have &PL_padname_const "names" (see "pad_alloc"). That
&PL_padname_undef and &PL_padname_const are used is an
implementation detail subject to change. To test for them, use
"!PadnamePV(name)" and "PadnamePV(name)&&!PadnameLEN(name)",
respectively.
Only "my"/"our" variable slots get valid names. The rest are
op targets/GVs/constants which are statically allocated or
resolved at compile time. These don't have names by which they
can be looked up from Perl code at run time through eval"" the
way "my"/"our" variables can be. Since they can't be looked up
by "name" but only by their index allocated at compile time
(which is usually in "PL_op-"op_targ>), wasting a name SV for
them doesn't make sense.
The pad names in the PADNAMELIST have their PV holding the name
of the variable. The "COP_SEQ_RANGE_LOW" and "_HIGH" fields
form a range (low+1..high inclusive) of cop_seq numbers for
which the name is valid. During compilation, these fields may
hold the special value PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO to indicate various
stages:
COP_SEQ_RANGE_LOW _HIGH
----------------- -----
PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO 0 variable not yet introduced:
{ my ($x
valid-seq# PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO variable in scope:
{ my ($x)
valid-seq# valid-seq# compilation of scope complete:
{ my ($x) }
For typed lexicals "PadnameTYPE" points at the type stash. For
"our" lexicals, "PadnameOURSTASH" points at the stash of the
associated global (so that duplicate "our" declarations in the
same package can be detected). "PadnameGEN" is sometimes used
to store the generation number during compilation.
If "PadnameOUTER" is set on the pad name, then that slot in the
frame AV is a REFCNT'ed reference to a lexical from "outside".
Such entries are sometimes referred to as 'fake'. In this
case, the name does not use 'low' and 'high' to store a cop_seq
range, since it is in scope throughout. Instead 'high' stores
some flags containing info about the real lexical (is it
declared in an anon, and is it capable of being instantiated
multiple times?), and for fake ANONs, 'low' contains the index
within the parent's pad where the lexical's value is stored, to
make cloning quicker.
If the 'name' is "&" the corresponding entry in the PAD is a CV
representing a possible closure.
Note that formats are treated as anon subs, and are cloned each
time write is called (if necessary).
The flag "SVs_PADSTALE" is cleared on lexicals each time the
"my()" is executed, and set on scope exit. This allows the
"Variable $x is not available" warning to be generated in
evals, such as
{ my $x = 1; sub f { eval '$x'} } f();
For state vars, "SVs_PADSTALE" is overloaded to mean 'not yet
initialised', but this internal state is stored in a separate
pad entry.
PADLIST * CvPADLIST(CV *cv)
pad_add_name_pvs
Exactly like "pad_add_name_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated
literal string instead of a string/length pair.
PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pvs(const char *name, U32 flags,
HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)
PadARRAY
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The C array of pad entries.
SV ** PadARRAY(PAD pad)
pad_findmy_pvs
Exactly like "pad_findmy_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated
literal string instead of a string/length pair.
PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pvs(const char *name, U32 flags)
PadlistARRAY
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The C array of a padlist, containing the pads. Only subscript
it with numbers >= 1, as the 0th entry is not guaranteed to
remain usable.
PAD ** PadlistARRAY(PADLIST padlist)
PadlistMAX
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The index of the last allocated space in the padlist. Note
that the last pad may be in an earlier slot. Any entries
following it will be "NULL" in that case.
SSize_t PadlistMAX(PADLIST padlist)
PadlistNAMES
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The names associated with pad entries.
PADNAMELIST * PadlistNAMES(PADLIST padlist)
PadlistNAMESARRAY
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The C array of pad names.
PADNAME ** PadlistNAMESARRAY(PADLIST padlist)
PadlistNAMESMAX
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The index of the last pad name.
SSize_t PadlistNAMESMAX(PADLIST padlist)
PadlistREFCNT
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The reference count of the padlist. Currently this is always
1.
U32 PadlistREFCNT(PADLIST padlist)
PadMAX NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The index of the last pad entry.
SSize_t PadMAX(PAD pad)
PadnameLEN
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The length of the name.
STRLEN PadnameLEN(PADNAME pn)
PadnamelistARRAY
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The C array of pad names.
PADNAME ** PadnamelistARRAY(PADNAMELIST pnl)
PadnamelistMAX
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The index of the last pad name.
SSize_t PadnamelistMAX(PADNAMELIST pnl)
PadnamelistREFCNT
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The reference count of the pad name list.
SSize_t PadnamelistREFCNT(PADNAMELIST pnl)
PadnamelistREFCNT_dec
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Lowers the reference count of the pad name list.
void PadnamelistREFCNT_dec(PADNAMELIST pnl)
PadnamePV
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The name stored in the pad name struct. This returns "NULL"
for a target slot.
char * PadnamePV(PADNAME pn)
PadnameREFCNT
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
The reference count of the pad name.
SSize_t PadnameREFCNT(PADNAME pn)
PadnameREFCNT_dec
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Lowers the reference count of the pad name.
void PadnameREFCNT_dec(PADNAME pn)
PadnameSV
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Returns the pad name as a mortal SV.
SV * PadnameSV(PADNAME pn)
PadnameUTF8
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Whether PadnamePV is in UTF-8. Currently, this is always true.
bool PadnameUTF8(PADNAME pn)
pad_new Create a new padlist, updating the global variables for the
currently-compiling padlist to point to the new padlist. The
following flags can be OR'ed together:
padnew_CLONE this pad is for a cloned CV
padnew_SAVE save old globals on the save stack
padnew_SAVESUB also save extra stuff for start of sub
PADLIST * pad_new(int flags)
PL_comppad
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
During compilation, this points to the array containing the
values part of the pad for the currently-compiling code. (At
runtime a CV may have many such value arrays; at compile time
just one is constructed.) At runtime, this points to the array
containing the currently-relevant values for the pad for the
currently-executing code.
PL_comppad_name
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
During compilation, this points to the array containing the
names part of the pad for the currently-compiling code.
PL_curpad
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Points directly to the body of the "PL_comppad" array. (I.e.,
this is "PAD_ARRAY(PL_comppad)".)
Per-Interpreter Variables
PL_modglobal
"PL_modglobal" is a general purpose, interpreter global HV for
use by extensions that need to keep information on a per-
interpreter basis. In a pinch, it can also be used as a symbol
table for extensions to share data among each other. It is a
good idea to use keys prefixed by the package name of the
extension that owns the data.
HV* PL_modglobal
PL_na A convenience variable which is typically used with "SvPV" when
one doesn't care about the length of the string. It is usually
more efficient to either declare a local variable and use that
instead or to use the "SvPV_nolen" macro.
STRLEN PL_na
PL_opfreehook
When non-"NULL", the function pointed by this variable will be
called each time an OP is freed with the corresponding OP as
the argument. This allows extensions to free any extra
attribute they have locally attached to an OP. It is also
assured to first fire for the parent OP and then for its kids.
When you replace this variable, it is considered a good
practice to store the possibly previously installed hook and
that you recall it inside your own.
Perl_ophook_t PL_opfreehook
PL_peepp
Pointer to the per-subroutine peephole optimiser. This is a
function that gets called at the end of compilation of a Perl
subroutine (or equivalently independent piece of Perl code) to
perform fixups of some ops and to perform small-scale
optimisations. The function is called once for each subroutine
that is compiled, and is passed, as sole parameter, a pointer
to the op that is the entry point to the subroutine. It
modifies the op tree in place.
The peephole optimiser should never be completely replaced.
Rather, add code to it by wrapping the existing optimiser. The
basic way to do this can be seen in "Compile pass 3: peephole
optimization" in perlguts. If the new code wishes to operate
on ops throughout the subroutine's structure, rather than just
at the top level, it is likely to be more convenient to wrap
the "PL_rpeepp" hook.
peep_t PL_peepp
PL_rpeepp
Pointer to the recursive peephole optimiser. This is a
function that gets called at the end of compilation of a Perl
subroutine (or equivalently independent piece of Perl code) to
perform fixups of some ops and to perform small-scale
optimisations. The function is called once for each chain of
ops linked through their "op_next" fields; it is recursively
called to handle each side chain. It is passed, as sole
parameter, a pointer to the op that is at the head of the
chain. It modifies the op tree in place.
The peephole optimiser should never be completely replaced.
Rather, add code to it by wrapping the existing optimiser. The
basic way to do this can be seen in "Compile pass 3: peephole
optimization" in perlguts. If the new code wishes to operate
only on ops at a subroutine's top level, rather than throughout
the structure, it is likely to be more convenient to wrap the
"PL_peepp" hook.
peep_t PL_rpeepp
PL_sv_no
This is the "false" SV. See "PL_sv_yes". Always refer to this
as &PL_sv_no.
SV PL_sv_no
PL_sv_undef
This is the "undef" SV. Always refer to this as &PL_sv_undef.
SV PL_sv_undef
PL_sv_yes
This is the "true" SV. See "PL_sv_no". Always refer to this
as &PL_sv_yes.
SV PL_sv_yes
REGEXP Functions
SvRX Convenience macro to get the REGEXP from a SV. This is
approximately equivalent to the following snippet:
if (SvMAGICAL(sv))
mg_get(sv);
if (SvROK(sv))
sv = MUTABLE_SV(SvRV(sv));
if (SvTYPE(sv) == SVt_REGEXP)
return (REGEXP*) sv;
"NULL" will be returned if a REGEXP* is not found.
REGEXP * SvRX(SV *sv)
SvRXOK Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV (or the one it
references) is a REGEXP.
If you want to do something with the REGEXP* later use SvRX
instead and check for NULL.
bool SvRXOK(SV* sv)
Stack Manipulation Macros
dMARK Declare a stack marker variable, "mark", for the XSUB. See
"MARK" and "dORIGMARK".
dMARK;
dORIGMARK
Saves the original stack mark for the XSUB. See "ORIGMARK".
dORIGMARK;
dSP Declares a local copy of perl's stack pointer for the XSUB,
available via the "SP" macro. See "SP".
dSP;
EXTEND Used to extend the argument stack for an XSUB's return values.
Once used, guarantees that there is room for at least "nitems"
to be pushed onto the stack.
void EXTEND(SP, SSize_t nitems)
MARK Stack marker variable for the XSUB. See "dMARK".
mPUSHi Push an integer onto the stack. The stack must have room for
this element. Does not use "TARG". See also "PUSHi",
"mXPUSHi" and "XPUSHi".
void mPUSHi(IV iv)
mPUSHn Push a double onto the stack. The stack must have room for
this element. Does not use "TARG". See also "PUSHn",
"mXPUSHn" and "XPUSHn".
void mPUSHn(NV nv)
mPUSHp Push a string onto the stack. The stack must have room for
this element. The "len" indicates the length of the string.
Does not use "TARG". See also "PUSHp", "mXPUSHp" and "XPUSHp".
void mPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
mPUSHs Push an SV onto the stack and mortalizes the SV. The stack
must have room for this element. Does not use "TARG". See
also "PUSHs" and "mXPUSHs".
void mPUSHs(SV* sv)
mPUSHu Push an unsigned integer onto the stack. The stack must have
room for this element. Does not use "TARG". See also "PUSHu",
"mXPUSHu" and "XPUSHu".
void mPUSHu(UV uv)
mXPUSHi Push an integer onto the stack, extending the stack if
necessary. Does not use "TARG". See also "XPUSHi", "mPUSHi"
and "PUSHi".
void mXPUSHi(IV iv)
mXPUSHn Push a double onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Does not use "TARG". See also "XPUSHn", "mPUSHn" and "PUSHn".
void mXPUSHn(NV nv)
mXPUSHp Push a string onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
The "len" indicates the length of the string. Does not use
"TARG". See also "XPUSHp", "mPUSHp" and "PUSHp".
void mXPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
mXPUSHs Push an SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary and
mortalizes the SV. Does not use "TARG". See also "XPUSHs" and
"mPUSHs".
void mXPUSHs(SV* sv)
mXPUSHu Push an unsigned integer onto the stack, extending the stack if
necessary. Does not use "TARG". See also "XPUSHu", "mPUSHu"
and "PUSHu".
void mXPUSHu(UV uv)
ORIGMARK
The original stack mark for the XSUB. See "dORIGMARK".
POPi Pops an integer off the stack.
IV POPi
POPl Pops a long off the stack.
long POPl
POPn Pops a double off the stack.
NV POPn
POPp Pops a string off the stack.
char* POPp
POPpbytex
Pops a string off the stack which must consist of bytes i.e.
characters < 256.
char* POPpbytex
POPpx Pops a string off the stack. Identical to POPp. There are two
names for historical reasons.
char* POPpx
POPs Pops an SV off the stack.
SV* POPs
POPu Pops an unsigned integer off the stack.
UV POPu
POPul Pops an unsigned long off the stack.
long POPul
PUSHi Push an integer onto the stack. The stack must have room for
this element. Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET"
or "dXSTARG" should be called to declare it. Do not call
multiple "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's -
see "mPUSHi" instead. See also "XPUSHi" and "mXPUSHi".
void PUSHi(IV iv)
PUSHMARK
Opening bracket for arguments on a callback. See "PUTBACK" and
perlcall.
void PUSHMARK(SP)
PUSHmortal
Push a new mortal SV onto the stack. The stack must have room
for this element. Does not use "TARG". See also "PUSHs",
"XPUSHmortal" and "XPUSHs".
void PUSHmortal()
PUSHn Push a double onto the stack. The stack must have room for
this element. Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET"
or "dXSTARG" should be called to declare it. Do not call
multiple "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's -
see "mPUSHn" instead. See also "XPUSHn" and "mXPUSHn".
void PUSHn(NV nv)
PUSHp Push a string onto the stack. The stack must have room for
this element. The "len" indicates the length of the string.
Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG"
should be called to declare it. Do not call multiple
"TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
"mPUSHp" instead. See also "XPUSHp" and "mXPUSHp".
void PUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
PUSHs Push an SV onto the stack. The stack must have room for this
element. Does not handle 'set' magic. Does not use "TARG".
See also "PUSHmortal", "XPUSHs", and "XPUSHmortal".
void PUSHs(SV* sv)
PUSHu Push an unsigned integer onto the stack. The stack must have
room for this element. Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so
"dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be called to declare it. Do not
call multiple "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from
XSUB's - see "mPUSHu" instead. See also "XPUSHu" and
"mXPUSHu".
void PUSHu(UV uv)
PUTBACK Closing bracket for XSUB arguments. This is usually handled by
"xsubpp". See "PUSHMARK" and perlcall for other uses.
PUTBACK;
SP Stack pointer. This is usually handled by "xsubpp". See "dSP"
and "SPAGAIN".
SPAGAIN Refetch the stack pointer. Used after a callback. See
perlcall.
SPAGAIN;
XPUSHi Push an integer onto the stack, extending the stack if
necessary. Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or
"dXSTARG" should be called to declare it. Do not call multiple
"TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
"mXPUSHi" instead. See also "PUSHi" and "mPUSHi".
void XPUSHi(IV iv)
XPUSHmortal
Push a new mortal SV onto the stack, extending the stack if
necessary. Does not use "TARG". See also "XPUSHs",
"PUSHmortal" and "PUSHs".
void XPUSHmortal()
XPUSHn Push a double onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG"
should be called to declare it. Do not call multiple
"TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
"mXPUSHn" instead. See also "PUSHn" and "mPUSHn".
void XPUSHn(NV nv)
XPUSHp Push a string onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
The "len" indicates the length of the string. Handles 'set'
magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be called
to declare it. Do not call multiple "TARG"-oriented macros to
return lists from XSUB's - see "mXPUSHp" instead. See also
"PUSHp" and "mPUSHp".
void XPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)
XPUSHs Push an SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.
Does not handle 'set' magic. Does not use "TARG". See also
"XPUSHmortal", "PUSHs" and "PUSHmortal".
void XPUSHs(SV* sv)
XPUSHu Push an unsigned integer onto the stack, extending the stack if
necessary. Handles 'set' magic. Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or
"dXSTARG" should be called to declare it. Do not call multiple
"TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
"mXPUSHu" instead. See also "PUSHu" and "mPUSHu".
void XPUSHu(UV uv)
XSRETURN
Return from XSUB, indicating number of items on the stack.
This is usually handled by "xsubpp".
void XSRETURN(int nitems)
XSRETURN_EMPTY
Return an empty list from an XSUB immediately.
XSRETURN_EMPTY;
XSRETURN_IV
Return an integer from an XSUB immediately. Uses "XST_mIV".
void XSRETURN_IV(IV iv)
XSRETURN_NO
Return &PL_sv_no from an XSUB immediately. Uses "XST_mNO".
XSRETURN_NO;
XSRETURN_NV
Return a double from an XSUB immediately. Uses "XST_mNV".
void XSRETURN_NV(NV nv)
XSRETURN_PV
Return a copy of a string from an XSUB immediately. Uses
"XST_mPV".
void XSRETURN_PV(char* str)
XSRETURN_UNDEF
Return &PL_sv_undef from an XSUB immediately. Uses
"XST_mUNDEF".
XSRETURN_UNDEF;
XSRETURN_UV
Return an integer from an XSUB immediately. Uses "XST_mUV".
void XSRETURN_UV(IV uv)
XSRETURN_YES
Return &PL_sv_yes from an XSUB immediately. Uses "XST_mYES".
XSRETURN_YES;
XST_mIV Place an integer into the specified position "pos" on the
stack. The value is stored in a new mortal SV.
void XST_mIV(int pos, IV iv)
XST_mNO Place &PL_sv_no into the specified position "pos" on the stack.
void XST_mNO(int pos)
XST_mNV Place a double into the specified position "pos" on the stack.
The value is stored in a new mortal SV.
void XST_mNV(int pos, NV nv)
XST_mPV Place a copy of a string into the specified position "pos" on
the stack. The value is stored in a new mortal SV.
void XST_mPV(int pos, char* str)
XST_mUNDEF
Place &PL_sv_undef into the specified position "pos" on the
stack.
void XST_mUNDEF(int pos)
XST_mYES
Place &PL_sv_yes into the specified position "pos" on the
stack.
void XST_mYES(int pos)
SV-Body Allocation
looks_like_number
Test if the content of an SV looks like a number (or is a
number). "Inf" and "Infinity" are treated as numbers (so will
not issue a non-numeric warning), even if your "atof()" doesn't
grok them. Get-magic is ignored.
I32 looks_like_number(SV *const sv)
newRV_noinc
Creates an RV wrapper for an SV. The reference count for the
original SV is not incremented.
SV* newRV_noinc(SV *const tmpRef)
newSV Creates a new SV. A non-zero "len" parameter indicates the
number of bytes of preallocated string space the SV should
have. An extra byte for a trailing "NUL" is also reserved.
("SvPOK" is not set for the SV even if string space is
allocated.) The reference count for the new SV is set to 1.
In 5.9.3, "newSV()" replaces the older "NEWSV()" API, and drops
the first parameter, x, a debug aid which allowed callers to
identify themselves. This aid has been superseded by a new
build option, "PERL_MEM_LOG" (see "PERL_MEM_LOG" in
perlhacktips). The older API is still there for use in XS
modules supporting older perls.
SV* newSV(const STRLEN len)
newSVhek
Creates a new SV from the hash key structure. It will generate
scalars that point to the shared string table where possible.
Returns a new (undefined) SV if "hek" is NULL.
SV* newSVhek(const HEK *const hek)
newSViv Creates a new SV and copies an integer into it. The reference
count for the SV is set to 1.
SV* newSViv(const IV i)
newSVnv Creates a new SV and copies a floating point value into it.
The reference count for the SV is set to 1.
SV* newSVnv(const NV n)
newSVpv Creates a new SV and copies a string (which may contain "NUL"
("\0") characters) into it. The reference count for the SV is
set to 1. If "len" is zero, Perl will compute the length using
"strlen()", (which means if you use this option, that "s" can't
have embedded "NUL" characters and has to have a terminating
"NUL" byte).
For efficiency, consider using "newSVpvn" instead.
SV* newSVpv(const char *const s, const STRLEN len)
newSVpvf
Creates a new SV and initializes it with the string formatted
like "sv_catpvf".
SV* newSVpvf(const char *const pat, ...)
newSVpvn
Creates a new SV and copies a string into it, which may contain
"NUL" characters ("\0") and other binary data. The reference
count for the SV is set to 1. Note that if "len" is zero, Perl
will create a zero length (Perl) string. You are responsible
for ensuring that the source buffer is at least "len" bytes
long. If the "buffer" argument is NULL the new SV will be
undefined.
SV* newSVpvn(const char *const s, const STRLEN len)
newSVpvn_flags
Creates a new SV and copies a string (which may contain "NUL"
("\0") characters) into it. The reference count for the SV is
set to 1. Note that if "len" is zero, Perl will create a zero
length string. You are responsible for ensuring that the
source string is at least "len" bytes long. If the "s"
argument is NULL the new SV will be undefined. Currently the
only flag bits accepted are "SVf_UTF8" and "SVs_TEMP". If
"SVs_TEMP" is set, then "sv_2mortal()" is called on the result
before returning. If "SVf_UTF8" is set, "s" is considered to
be in UTF-8 and the "SVf_UTF8" flag will be set on the new SV.
"newSVpvn_utf8()" is a convenience wrapper for this function,
defined as
#define newSVpvn_utf8(s, len, u) \
newSVpvn_flags((s), (len), (u) ? SVf_UTF8 : 0)
SV* newSVpvn_flags(const char *const s,
const STRLEN len,
const U32 flags)
newSVpvn_share
Creates a new SV with its "SvPVX_const" pointing to a shared
string in the string table. If the string does not already
exist in the table, it is created first. Turns on the
"SvIsCOW" flag (or "READONLY" and "FAKE" in 5.16 and earlier).
If the "hash" parameter is non-zero, that value is used;
otherwise the hash is computed. The string's hash can later be
retrieved from the SV with the "SvSHARED_HASH()" macro. The
idea here is that as the string table is used for shared hash
keys these strings will have "SvPVX_const == HeKEY" and hash
lookup will avoid string compare.
SV* newSVpvn_share(const char* s, I32 len, U32 hash)
newSVpvs
Like "newSVpvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
SV* newSVpvs(const char* s)
newSVpvs_flags
Like "newSVpvn_flags", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
SV* newSVpvs_flags(const char* s, U32 flags)
newSVpv_share
Like "newSVpvn_share", but takes a "NUL"-terminated string
instead of a string/length pair.
SV* newSVpv_share(const char* s, U32 hash)
newSVpvs_share
Like "newSVpvn_share", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair and omits the hash
parameter.
SV* newSVpvs_share(const char* s)
newSVrv Creates a new SV for the existing RV, "rv", to point to. If
"rv" is not an RV then it will be upgraded to one. If
"classname" is non-null then the new SV will be blessed in the
specified package. The new SV is returned and its reference
count is 1. The reference count 1 is owned by "rv".
SV* newSVrv(SV *const rv,
const char *const classname)
newSVsv Creates a new SV which is an exact duplicate of the original
SV. (Uses "sv_setsv".)
SV* newSVsv(SV *const old)
newSV_type
Creates a new SV, of the type specified. The reference count
for the new SV is set to 1.
SV* newSV_type(const svtype type)
newSVuv Creates a new SV and copies an unsigned integer into it. The
reference count for the SV is set to 1.
SV* newSVuv(const UV u)
sv_2bool
This macro is only used by "sv_true()" or its macro equivalent,
and only if the latter's argument is neither "SvPOK", "SvIOK"
nor "SvNOK". It calls "sv_2bool_flags" with the "SV_GMAGIC"
flag.
bool sv_2bool(SV *const sv)
sv_2bool_flags
This function is only used by "sv_true()" and friends, and
only if the latter's argument is neither "SvPOK", "SvIOK" nor
"SvNOK". If the flags contain "SV_GMAGIC", then it does an
"mg_get()" first.
bool sv_2bool_flags(SV *sv, I32 flags)
sv_2cv Using various gambits, try to get a CV from an SV; in addition,
try if possible to set *st and *gvp to the stash and GV
associated with it. The flags in "lref" are passed to
"gv_fetchsv".
CV* sv_2cv(SV* sv, HV **const st, GV **const gvp,
const I32 lref)
sv_2io Using various gambits, try to get an IO from an SV: the IO slot
if its a GV; or the recursive result if we're an RV; or the IO
slot of the symbol named after the PV if we're a string.
'Get' magic is ignored on the "sv" passed in, but will be
called on "SvRV(sv)" if "sv" is an RV.
IO* sv_2io(SV *const sv)
sv_2iv_flags
Return the integer value of an SV, doing any necessary string
conversion. If "flags" has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, does an
"mg_get()" first. Normally used via the "SvIV(sv)" and
"SvIVx(sv)" macros.
IV sv_2iv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)
sv_2mortal
Marks an existing SV as mortal. The SV will be destroyed
"soon", either by an explicit call to "FREETMPS", or by an
implicit call at places such as statement boundaries.
"SvTEMP()" is turned on which means that the SV's string buffer
can be "stolen" if this SV is copied. See also "sv_newmortal"
and "sv_mortalcopy".
SV* sv_2mortal(SV *const sv)
sv_2nv_flags
Return the num value of an SV, doing any necessary string or
integer conversion. If "flags" has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set,
does an "mg_get()" first. Normally used via the "SvNV(sv)" and
"SvNVx(sv)" macros.
NV sv_2nv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)
sv_2pvbyte
Return a pointer to the byte-encoded representation of the SV,
and set *lp to its length. May cause the SV to be downgraded
from UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the "SvPVbyte" macro.
char* sv_2pvbyte(SV *sv, STRLEN *const lp)
sv_2pvutf8
Return a pointer to the UTF-8-encoded representation of the SV,
and set *lp to its length. May cause the SV to be upgraded to
UTF-8 as a side-effect.
Usually accessed via the "SvPVutf8" macro.
char* sv_2pvutf8(SV *sv, STRLEN *const lp)
sv_2pv_flags
Returns a pointer to the string value of an SV, and sets *lp to
its length. If flags has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, does an
"mg_get()" first. Coerces "sv" to a string if necessary.
Normally invoked via the "SvPV_flags" macro. "sv_2pv()" and
"sv_2pv_nomg" usually end up here too.
char* sv_2pv_flags(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp,
const I32 flags)
sv_2uv_flags
Return the unsigned integer value of an SV, doing any necessary
string conversion. If "flags" has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set,
does an "mg_get()" first. Normally used via the "SvUV(sv)" and
"SvUVx(sv)" macros.
UV sv_2uv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)
sv_backoff
Remove any string offset. You should normally use the
"SvOOK_off" macro wrapper instead.
void sv_backoff(SV *const sv)
sv_bless
Blesses an SV into a specified package. The SV must be an RV.
The package must be designated by its stash (see "gv_stashpv").
The reference count of the SV is unaffected.
SV* sv_bless(SV *const sv, HV *const stash)
sv_catpv
Concatenates the "NUL"-terminated string onto the end of the
string which is in the SV. If the SV has the UTF-8 status set,
then the bytes appended should be valid UTF-8. Handles 'get'
magic, but not 'set' magic. See "sv_catpv_mg".
void sv_catpv(SV *const sv, const char* ptr)
sv_catpvf
Processes its arguments like "sv_catpvfn", and appends the
formatted output to an SV. As with "sv_catpvfn" called with a
non-null C-style variable argument list, argument reordering is
not supported. If the appended data contains "wide" characters
(including, but not limited to, SVs with a UTF-8 PV formatted
with %s, and characters >255 formatted with %c), the original
SV might get upgraded to UTF-8. Handles 'get' magic, but not
'set' magic. See "sv_catpvf_mg". If the original SV was
UTF-8, the pattern should be valid UTF-8; if the original SV
was bytes, the pattern should be too.
void sv_catpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
...)
sv_catpvf_mg
Like "sv_catpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_catpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
const char *const pat, ...)
sv_catpvn
Concatenates the string onto the end of the string which is in
the SV. "len" indicates number of bytes to copy. If the SV
has the UTF-8 status set, then the bytes appended should be
valid UTF-8. Handles 'get' magic, but not 'set' magic. See
"sv_catpvn_mg".
void sv_catpvn(SV *dsv, const char *sstr, STRLEN len)
sv_catpvn_flags
Concatenates the string onto the end of the string which is in
the SV. The "len" indicates number of bytes to copy.
By default, the string appended is assumed to be valid UTF-8 if
the SV has the UTF-8 status set, and a string of bytes
otherwise. One can force the appended string to be interpreted
as UTF-8 by supplying the "SV_CATUTF8" flag, and as bytes by
supplying the "SV_CATBYTES" flag; the SV or the string appended
will be upgraded to UTF-8 if necessary.
If "flags" has the "SV_SMAGIC" bit set, will "mg_set" on "dsv"
afterwards if appropriate. "sv_catpvn" and "sv_catpvn_nomg"
are implemented in terms of this function.
void sv_catpvn_flags(SV *const dstr,
const char *sstr,
const STRLEN len,
const I32 flags)
sv_catpvs
Like "sv_catpvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
void sv_catpvs(SV* sv, const char* s)
sv_catpvs_flags
Like "sv_catpvn_flags", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
void sv_catpvs_flags(SV* sv, const char* s,
I32 flags)
sv_catpvs_mg
Like "sv_catpvn_mg", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
void sv_catpvs_mg(SV* sv, const char* s)
sv_catpvs_nomg
Like "sv_catpvn_nomg", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
void sv_catpvs_nomg(SV* sv, const char* s)
sv_catpv_flags
Concatenates the "NUL"-terminated string onto the end of the
string which is in the SV. If the SV has the UTF-8 status set,
then the bytes appended should be valid UTF-8. If "flags" has
the "SV_SMAGIC" bit set, will "mg_set" on the modified SV if
appropriate.
void sv_catpv_flags(SV *dstr, const char *sstr,
const I32 flags)
sv_catpv_mg
Like "sv_catpv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_catpv_mg(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
sv_catsv
Concatenates the string from SV "ssv" onto the end of the
string in SV "dsv". If "ssv" is null, does nothing; otherwise
modifies only "dsv". Handles 'get' magic on both SVs, but no
'set' magic. See "sv_catsv_mg" and "sv_catsv_nomg".
void sv_catsv(SV *dstr, SV *sstr)
sv_catsv_flags
Concatenates the string from SV "ssv" onto the end of the
string in SV "dsv". If "ssv" is null, does nothing; otherwise
modifies only "dsv". If "flags" has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set,
will call "mg_get" on both SVs if appropriate. If "flags" has
the "SV_SMAGIC" bit set, "mg_set" will be called on the
modified SV afterward, if appropriate. "sv_catsv",
"sv_catsv_nomg", and "sv_catsv_mg" are implemented in terms of
this function.
void sv_catsv_flags(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv,
const I32 flags)
sv_chop Efficient removal of characters from the beginning of the
string buffer. "SvPOK(sv)", or at least "SvPOKp(sv)", must be
true and "ptr" must be a pointer to somewhere inside the string
buffer. "ptr" becomes the first character of the adjusted
string. Uses the "OOK" hack. On return, only "SvPOK(sv)" and
"SvPOKp(sv)" among the "OK" flags will be true.
Beware: after this function returns, "ptr" and SvPVX_const(sv)
may no longer refer to the same chunk of data.
The unfortunate similarity of this function's name to that of
Perl's "chop" operator is strictly coincidental. This function
works from the left; "chop" works from the right.
void sv_chop(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
sv_clear
Clear an SV: call any destructors, free up any memory used by
the body, and free the body itself. The SV's head is not
freed, although its type is set to all 1's so that it won't
inadvertently be assumed to be live during global destruction
etc. This function should only be called when "REFCNT" is
zero. Most of the time you'll want to call "sv_free()" (or its
macro wrapper "SvREFCNT_dec") instead.
void sv_clear(SV *const orig_sv)
sv_cmp Compares the strings in two SVs. Returns -1, 0, or 1
indicating whether the string in "sv1" is less than, equal to,
or greater than the string in "sv2". Is UTF-8 and 'usebytes'
aware, handles get magic, and will coerce its args to strings
if necessary. See also "sv_cmp_locale".
I32 sv_cmp(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2)
sv_cmp_flags
Compares the strings in two SVs. Returns -1, 0, or 1
indicating whether the string in "sv1" is less than, equal to,
or greater than the string in "sv2". Is UTF-8 and 'usebytes'
aware and will coerce its args to strings if necessary. If the
flags has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, it handles get magic. See
also "sv_cmp_locale_flags".
I32 sv_cmp_flags(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2,
const U32 flags)
sv_cmp_locale
Compares the strings in two SVs in a locale-aware manner. Is
UTF-8 and 'usebytes' aware, handles get magic, and will coerce
its args to strings if necessary. See also "sv_cmp".
I32 sv_cmp_locale(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2)
sv_cmp_locale_flags
Compares the strings in two SVs in a locale-aware manner. Is
UTF-8 and 'usebytes' aware and will coerce its args to strings
if necessary. If the flags contain "SV_GMAGIC", it handles get
magic. See also "sv_cmp_flags".
I32 sv_cmp_locale_flags(SV *const sv1,
SV *const sv2,
const U32 flags)
sv_collxfrm
This calls "sv_collxfrm_flags" with the SV_GMAGIC flag. See
"sv_collxfrm_flags".
char* sv_collxfrm(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const nxp)
sv_collxfrm_flags
Add Collate Transform magic to an SV if it doesn't already have
it. If the flags contain "SV_GMAGIC", it handles get-magic.
Any scalar variable may carry "PERL_MAGIC_collxfrm" magic that
contains the scalar data of the variable, but transformed to
such a format that a normal memory comparison can be used to
compare the data according to the locale settings.
char* sv_collxfrm_flags(SV *const sv,
STRLEN *const nxp,
I32 const flags)
sv_copypv_flags
Implementation of "sv_copypv" and "sv_copypv_nomg". Calls get
magic iff flags has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set.
void sv_copypv_flags(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv,
const I32 flags)
sv_copypv_nomg
Like "sv_copypv", but doesn't invoke get magic first.
void sv_copypv_nomg(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv)
sv_dec Auto-decrement of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric
conversion if necessary. Handles 'get' magic and operator
overloading.
void sv_dec(SV *const sv)
sv_dec_nomg
Auto-decrement of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric
conversion if necessary. Handles operator overloading. Skips
handling 'get' magic.
void sv_dec_nomg(SV *const sv)
sv_eq Returns a boolean indicating whether the strings in the two SVs
are identical. Is UTF-8 and 'usebytes' aware, handles get
magic, and will coerce its args to strings if necessary.
I32 sv_eq(SV* sv1, SV* sv2)
sv_eq_flags
Returns a boolean indicating whether the strings in the two SVs
are identical. Is UTF-8 and 'usebytes' aware and coerces its
args to strings if necessary. If the flags has the "SV_GMAGIC"
bit set, it handles get-magic, too.
I32 sv_eq_flags(SV* sv1, SV* sv2, const U32 flags)
sv_force_normal_flags
Undo various types of fakery on an SV, where fakery means "more
than" a string: if the PV is a shared string, make a private
copy; if we're a ref, stop refing; if we're a glob, downgrade
to an "xpvmg"; if we're a copy-on-write scalar, this is the on-
write time when we do the copy, and is also used locally; if
this is a vstring, drop the vstring magic. If "SV_COW_DROP_PV"
is set then a copy-on-write scalar drops its PV buffer (if any)
and becomes "SvPOK_off" rather than making a copy. (Used where
this scalar is about to be set to some other value.) In
addition, the "flags" parameter gets passed to
"sv_unref_flags()" when unreffing. "sv_force_normal" calls
this function with flags set to 0.
This function is expected to be used to signal to perl that
this SV is about to be written to, and any extra book-keeping
needs to be taken care of. Hence, it croaks on read-only
values.
void sv_force_normal_flags(SV *const sv,
const U32 flags)
sv_free Decrement an SV's reference count, and if it drops to zero,
call "sv_clear" to invoke destructors and free up any memory
used by the body; finally, deallocating the SV's head itself.
Normally called via a wrapper macro "SvREFCNT_dec".
void sv_free(SV *const sv)
sv_gets Get a line from the filehandle and store it into the SV,
optionally appending to the currently-stored string. If
"append" is not 0, the line is appended to the SV instead of
overwriting it. "append" should be set to the byte offset that
the appended string should start at in the SV (typically,
"SvCUR(sv)" is a suitable choice).
char* sv_gets(SV *const sv, PerlIO *const fp,
I32 append)
sv_get_backrefs
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
If "sv" is the target of a weak reference then it returns the
back references structure associated with the sv; otherwise
return "NULL".
When returning a non-null result the type of the return is
relevant. If it is an AV then the elements of the AV are the
weak reference RVs which point at this item. If it is any other
type then the item itself is the weak reference.
See also "Perl_sv_add_backref()", "Perl_sv_del_backref()",
"Perl_sv_kill_backrefs()"
SV* sv_get_backrefs(SV *const sv)
sv_grow Expands the character buffer in the SV. If necessary, uses
"sv_unref" and upgrades the SV to "SVt_PV". Returns a pointer
to the character buffer. Use the "SvGROW" wrapper instead.
char* sv_grow(SV *const sv, STRLEN newlen)
sv_inc Auto-increment of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric
conversion if necessary. Handles 'get' magic and operator
overloading.
void sv_inc(SV *const sv)
sv_inc_nomg
Auto-increment of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric
conversion if necessary. Handles operator overloading. Skips
handling 'get' magic.
void sv_inc_nomg(SV *const sv)
sv_insert
Inserts a string at the specified offset/length within the SV.
Similar to the Perl "substr()" function. Handles get magic.
void sv_insert(SV *const bigstr, const STRLEN offset,
const STRLEN len,
const char *const little,
const STRLEN littlelen)
sv_insert_flags
Same as "sv_insert", but the extra "flags" are passed to the
"SvPV_force_flags" that applies to "bigstr".
void sv_insert_flags(SV *const bigstr,
const STRLEN offset,
const STRLEN len,
const char *const little,
const STRLEN littlelen,
const U32 flags)
sv_isa Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is blessed into the
specified class. This does not check for subtypes; use
"sv_derived_from" to verify an inheritance relationship.
int sv_isa(SV* sv, const char *const name)
sv_isobject
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is an RV pointing
to a blessed object. If the SV is not an RV, or if the object
is not blessed, then this will return false.
int sv_isobject(SV* sv)
sv_len Returns the length of the string in the SV. Handles magic and
type coercion and sets the UTF8 flag appropriately. See also
"SvCUR", which gives raw access to the "xpv_cur" slot.
STRLEN sv_len(SV *const sv)
sv_len_utf8
Returns the number of characters in the string in an SV,
counting wide UTF-8 bytes as a single character. Handles magic
and type coercion.
STRLEN sv_len_utf8(SV *const sv)
sv_magic
Adds magic to an SV. First upgrades "sv" to type "SVt_PVMG" if
necessary, then adds a new magic item of type "how" to the head
of the magic list.
See "sv_magicext" (which "sv_magic" now calls) for a
description of the handling of the "name" and "namlen"
arguments.
You need to use "sv_magicext" to add magic to "SvREADONLY" SVs
and also to add more than one instance of the same "how".
void sv_magic(SV *const sv, SV *const obj,
const int how, const char *const name,
const I32 namlen)
sv_magicext
Adds magic to an SV, upgrading it if necessary. Applies the
supplied "vtable" and returns a pointer to the magic added.
Note that "sv_magicext" will allow things that "sv_magic" will
not. In particular, you can add magic to "SvREADONLY" SVs, and
add more than one instance of the same "how".
If "namlen" is greater than zero then a "savepvn" copy of
"name" is stored, if "namlen" is zero then "name" is stored as-
is and - as another special case - if "(name && namlen ==
HEf_SVKEY)" then "name" is assumed to contain an SV* and is
stored as-is with its "REFCNT" incremented.
(This is now used as a subroutine by "sv_magic".)
MAGIC * sv_magicext(SV *const sv, SV *const obj,
const int how,
const MGVTBL *const vtbl,
const char *const name,
const I32 namlen)
sv_mortalcopy
Creates a new SV which is a copy of the original SV (using
"sv_setsv"). The new SV is marked as mortal. It will be
destroyed "soon", either by an explicit call to "FREETMPS", or
by an implicit call at places such as statement boundaries.
See also "sv_newmortal" and "sv_2mortal".
SV* sv_mortalcopy(SV *const oldsv)
sv_newmortal
Creates a new null SV which is mortal. The reference count of
the SV is set to 1. It will be destroyed "soon", either by an
explicit call to "FREETMPS", or by an implicit call at places
such as statement boundaries. See also "sv_mortalcopy" and
"sv_2mortal".
SV* sv_newmortal()
sv_newref
Increment an SV's reference count. Use the "SvREFCNT_inc()"
wrapper instead.
SV* sv_newref(SV *const sv)
sv_pos_b2u
Converts the value pointed to by "offsetp" from a count of
bytes from the start of the string, to a count of the
equivalent number of UTF-8 chars. Handles magic and type
coercion.
Use "sv_pos_b2u_flags" in preference, which correctly handles
strings longer than 2Gb.
void sv_pos_b2u(SV *const sv, I32 *const offsetp)
sv_pos_b2u_flags
Converts "offset" from a count of bytes from the start of the
string, to a count of the equivalent number of UTF-8 chars.
Handles type coercion. "flags" is passed to "SvPV_flags", and
usually should be "SV_GMAGIC|SV_CONST_RETURN" to handle magic.
STRLEN sv_pos_b2u_flags(SV *const sv,
STRLEN const offset, U32 flags)
sv_pos_u2b
Converts the value pointed to by "offsetp" from a count of
UTF-8 chars from the start of the string, to a count of the
equivalent number of bytes; if "lenp" is non-zero, it does the
same to "lenp", but this time starting from the offset, rather
than from the start of the string. Handles magic and type
coercion.
Use "sv_pos_u2b_flags" in preference, which correctly handles
strings longer than 2Gb.
void sv_pos_u2b(SV *const sv, I32 *const offsetp,
I32 *const lenp)
sv_pos_u2b_flags
Converts the offset from a count of UTF-8 chars from the start
of the string, to a count of the equivalent number of bytes; if
"lenp" is non-zero, it does the same to "lenp", but this time
starting from "offset", rather than from the start of the
string. Handles type coercion. "flags" is passed to
"SvPV_flags", and usually should be "SV_GMAGIC|SV_CONST_RETURN"
to handle magic.
STRLEN sv_pos_u2b_flags(SV *const sv, STRLEN uoffset,
STRLEN *const lenp, U32 flags)
sv_pvbyten_force
The backend for the "SvPVbytex_force" macro. Always use the
macro instead.
char* sv_pvbyten_force(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp)
sv_pvn_force
Get a sensible string out of the SV somehow. A private
implementation of the "SvPV_force" macro for compilers which
can't cope with complex macro expressions. Always use the
macro instead.
char* sv_pvn_force(SV* sv, STRLEN* lp)
sv_pvn_force_flags
Get a sensible string out of the SV somehow. If "flags" has
the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, will "mg_get" on "sv" if appropriate,
else not. "sv_pvn_force" and "sv_pvn_force_nomg" are
implemented in terms of this function. You normally want to
use the various wrapper macros instead: see "SvPV_force" and
"SvPV_force_nomg".
char* sv_pvn_force_flags(SV *const sv,
STRLEN *const lp,
const I32 flags)
sv_pvutf8n_force
The backend for the "SvPVutf8x_force" macro. Always use the
macro instead.
char* sv_pvutf8n_force(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp)
sv_ref Returns a SV describing what the SV passed in is a reference
to.
dst can be a SV to be set to the description or NULL, in which
case a mortal SV is returned.
If ob is true and the SV is blessed, the description is the
class name, otherwise it is the type of the SV, "SCALAR",
"ARRAY" etc.
SV* sv_ref(SV *dst, const SV *const sv,
const int ob)
sv_reftype
Returns a string describing what the SV is a reference to.
If ob is true and the SV is blessed, the string is the class
name, otherwise it is the type of the SV, "SCALAR", "ARRAY"
etc.
const char* sv_reftype(const SV *const sv, const int ob)
sv_replace
Make the first argument a copy of the second, then delete the
original. The target SV physically takes over ownership of the
body of the source SV and inherits its flags; however, the
target keeps any magic it owns, and any magic in the source is
discarded. Note that this is a rather specialist SV copying
operation; most of the time you'll want to use "sv_setsv" or
one of its many macro front-ends.
void sv_replace(SV *const sv, SV *const nsv)
sv_reset
Underlying implementation for the "reset" Perl function. Note
that the perl-level function is vaguely deprecated.
void sv_reset(const char* s, HV *const stash)
sv_rvweaken
Weaken a reference: set the "SvWEAKREF" flag on this RV; give
the referred-to SV "PERL_MAGIC_backref" magic if it hasn't
already; and push a back-reference to this RV onto the array of
backreferences associated with that magic. If the RV is
magical, set magic will be called after the RV is cleared.
SV* sv_rvweaken(SV *const sv)
sv_setiv
Copies an integer into the given SV, upgrading first if
necessary. Does not handle 'set' magic. See also
"sv_setiv_mg".
void sv_setiv(SV *const sv, const IV num)
sv_setiv_mg
Like "sv_setiv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setiv_mg(SV *const sv, const IV i)
sv_setnv
Copies a double into the given SV, upgrading first if
necessary. Does not handle 'set' magic. See also
"sv_setnv_mg".
void sv_setnv(SV *const sv, const NV num)
sv_setnv_mg
Like "sv_setnv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setnv_mg(SV *const sv, const NV num)
sv_setpv
Copies a string into an SV. The string must be terminated with
a "NUL" character. Does not handle 'set' magic. See
"sv_setpv_mg".
void sv_setpv(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
sv_setpvf
Works like "sv_catpvf" but copies the text into the SV instead
of appending it. Does not handle 'set' magic. See
"sv_setpvf_mg".
void sv_setpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
...)
sv_setpvf_mg
Like "sv_setpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
const char *const pat, ...)
sv_setpviv
Copies an integer into the given SV, also updating its string
value. Does not handle 'set' magic. See "sv_setpviv_mg".
void sv_setpviv(SV *const sv, const IV num)
sv_setpviv_mg
Like "sv_setpviv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setpviv_mg(SV *const sv, const IV iv)
sv_setpvn
Copies a string (possibly containing embedded "NUL" characters)
into an SV. The "len" parameter indicates the number of bytes
to be copied. If the "ptr" argument is NULL the SV will become
undefined. Does not handle 'set' magic. See "sv_setpvn_mg".
void sv_setpvn(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr,
const STRLEN len)
sv_setpvn_mg
Like "sv_setpvn", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setpvn_mg(SV *const sv,
const char *const ptr,
const STRLEN len)
sv_setpvs
Like "sv_setpvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal string
instead of a string/length pair.
void sv_setpvs(SV* sv, const char* s)
sv_setpvs_mg
Like "sv_setpvn_mg", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
void sv_setpvs_mg(SV* sv, const char* s)
sv_setpv_mg
Like "sv_setpv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setpv_mg(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)
sv_setref_iv
Copies an integer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV.
The "rv" argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be
modified to point to the new SV. The "classname" argument
indicates the package for the blessing. Set "classname" to
"NULL" to avoid the blessing. The new SV will have a reference
count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
SV* sv_setref_iv(SV *const rv,
const char *const classname,
const IV iv)
sv_setref_nv
Copies a double into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The
"rv" argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be
modified to point to the new SV. The "classname" argument
indicates the package for the blessing. Set "classname" to
"NULL" to avoid the blessing. The new SV will have a reference
count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
SV* sv_setref_nv(SV *const rv,
const char *const classname,
const NV nv)
sv_setref_pv
Copies a pointer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV.
The "rv" argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be
modified to point to the new SV. If the "pv" argument is
"NULL", then "PL_sv_undef" will be placed into the SV. The
"classname" argument indicates the package for the blessing.
Set "classname" to "NULL" to avoid the blessing. The new SV
will have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
Do not use with other Perl types such as HV, AV, SV, CV,
because those objects will become corrupted by the pointer copy
process.
Note that "sv_setref_pvn" copies the string while this copies
the pointer.
SV* sv_setref_pv(SV *const rv,
const char *const classname,
void *const pv)
sv_setref_pvn
Copies a string into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV. The
length of the string must be specified with "n". The "rv"
argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV will be modified
to point to the new SV. The "classname" argument indicates the
package for the blessing. Set "classname" to "NULL" to avoid
the blessing. The new SV will have a reference count of 1, and
the RV will be returned.
Note that "sv_setref_pv" copies the pointer while this copies
the string.
SV* sv_setref_pvn(SV *const rv,
const char *const classname,
const char *const pv,
const STRLEN n)
sv_setref_pvs
Like "sv_setref_pvn", but takes a "NUL"-terminated literal
string instead of a string/length pair.
SV * sv_setref_pvs(const char* s)
sv_setref_uv
Copies an unsigned integer into a new SV, optionally blessing
the SV. The "rv" argument will be upgraded to an RV. That RV
will be modified to point to the new SV. The "classname"
argument indicates the package for the blessing. Set
"classname" to "NULL" to avoid the blessing. The new SV will
have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.
SV* sv_setref_uv(SV *const rv,
const char *const classname,
const UV uv)
sv_setsv
Copies the contents of the source SV "ssv" into the destination
SV "dsv". The source SV may be destroyed if it is mortal, so
don't use this function if the source SV needs to be reused.
Does not handle 'set' magic on destination SV. Calls 'get'
magic on source SV. Loosely speaking, it performs a copy-by-
value, obliterating any previous content of the destination.
You probably want to use one of the assortment of wrappers,
such as "SvSetSV", "SvSetSV_nosteal", "SvSetMagicSV" and
"SvSetMagicSV_nosteal".
void sv_setsv(SV *dstr, SV *sstr)
sv_setsv_flags
Copies the contents of the source SV "ssv" into the destination
SV "dsv". The source SV may be destroyed if it is mortal, so
don't use this function if the source SV needs to be reused.
Does not handle 'set' magic. Loosely speaking, it performs a
copy-by-value, obliterating any previous content of the
destination. If the "flags" parameter has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit
set, will "mg_get" on "ssv" if appropriate, else not. If the
"flags" parameter has the "SV_NOSTEAL" bit set then the buffers
of temps will not be stolen. "sv_setsv" and "sv_setsv_nomg"
are implemented in terms of this function.
You probably want to use one of the assortment of wrappers,
such as "SvSetSV", "SvSetSV_nosteal", "SvSetMagicSV" and
"SvSetMagicSV_nosteal".
This is the primary function for copying scalars, and most
other copy-ish functions and macros use this underneath.
void sv_setsv_flags(SV *dstr, SV *sstr,
const I32 flags)
sv_setsv_mg
Like "sv_setsv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setsv_mg(SV *const dstr, SV *const sstr)
sv_setuv
Copies an unsigned integer into the given SV, upgrading first
if necessary. Does not handle 'set' magic. See also
"sv_setuv_mg".
void sv_setuv(SV *const sv, const UV num)
sv_setuv_mg
Like "sv_setuv", but also handles 'set' magic.
void sv_setuv_mg(SV *const sv, const UV u)
sv_tainted
Test an SV for taintedness. Use "SvTAINTED" instead.
bool sv_tainted(SV *const sv)
sv_true Returns true if the SV has a true value by Perl's rules. Use
the "SvTRUE" macro instead, which may call "sv_true()" or may
instead use an in-line version.
I32 sv_true(SV *const sv)
sv_unmagic
Removes all magic of type "type" from an SV.
int sv_unmagic(SV *const sv, const int type)
sv_unmagicext
Removes all magic of type "type" with the specified "vtbl" from
an SV.
int sv_unmagicext(SV *const sv, const int type,
MGVTBL *vtbl)
sv_unref_flags
Unsets the RV status of the SV, and decrements the reference
count of whatever was being referenced by the RV. This can
almost be thought of as a reversal of "newSVrv". The "cflags"
argument can contain "SV_IMMEDIATE_UNREF" to force the
reference count to be decremented (otherwise the decrementing
is conditional on the reference count being different from one
or the reference being a readonly SV). See "SvROK_off".
void sv_unref_flags(SV *const ref, const U32 flags)
sv_untaint
Untaint an SV. Use "SvTAINTED_off" instead.
void sv_untaint(SV *const sv)
sv_upgrade
Upgrade an SV to a more complex form. Generally adds a new
body type to the SV, then copies across as much information as
possible from the old body. It croaks if the SV is already in
a more complex form than requested. You generally want to use
the "SvUPGRADE" macro wrapper, which checks the type before
calling "sv_upgrade", and hence does not croak. See also
"svtype".
void sv_upgrade(SV *const sv, svtype new_type)
sv_usepvn_flags
Tells an SV to use "ptr" to find its string value. Normally
the string is stored inside the SV, but sv_usepvn allows the SV
to use an outside string. "ptr" should point to memory that
was allocated by "Newx". It must be the start of a "Newx"-ed
block of memory, and not a pointer to the middle of it (beware
of "OOK" and copy-on-write), and not be from a non-"Newx"
memory allocator like "malloc". The string length, "len", must
be supplied. By default this function will "Renew" (i.e.
realloc, move) the memory pointed to by "ptr", so that pointer
should not be freed or used by the programmer after giving it
to "sv_usepvn", and neither should any pointers from "behind"
that pointer (e.g. ptr + 1) be used.
If "flags&SV_SMAGIC" is true, will call "SvSETMAGIC". If
"flags"&SV_HAS_TRAILING_NUL> is true, then "ptr[len]" must be
"NUL", and the realloc will be skipped (i.e. the buffer is
actually at least 1 byte longer than "len", and already meets
the requirements for storing in "SvPVX").
void sv_usepvn_flags(SV *const sv, char* ptr,
const STRLEN len,
const U32 flags)
sv_utf8_decode
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
If the PV of the SV is an octet sequence in UTF-8 and contains
a multiple-byte character, the "SvUTF8" flag is turned on so
that it looks like a character. If the PV contains only
single-byte characters, the "SvUTF8" flag stays off. Scans PV
for validity and returns false if the PV is invalid UTF-8.
bool sv_utf8_decode(SV *const sv)
sv_utf8_downgrade
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Attempts to convert the PV of an SV from characters to bytes.
If the PV contains a character that cannot fit in a byte, this
conversion will fail; in this case, either returns false or, if
"fail_ok" is not true, croaks.
This is not a general purpose Unicode to byte encoding
interface: use the "Encode" extension for that.
bool sv_utf8_downgrade(SV *const sv,
const bool fail_ok)
sv_utf8_encode
Converts the PV of an SV to UTF-8, but then turns the "SvUTF8"
flag off so that it looks like octets again.
void sv_utf8_encode(SV *const sv)
sv_utf8_upgrade
Converts the PV of an SV to its UTF-8-encoded form. Forces the
SV to string form if it is not already. Will "mg_get" on "sv"
if appropriate. Always sets the "SvUTF8" flag to avoid future
validity checks even if the whole string is the same in UTF-8
as not. Returns the number of bytes in the converted string
This is not a general purpose byte encoding to Unicode
interface: use the Encode extension for that.
STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade(SV *sv)
sv_utf8_upgrade_flags
Converts the PV of an SV to its UTF-8-encoded form. Forces the
SV to string form if it is not already. Always sets the SvUTF8
flag to avoid future validity checks even if all the bytes are
invariant in UTF-8. If "flags" has "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, will
"mg_get" on "sv" if appropriate, else not.
If "flags" has "SV_FORCE_UTF8_UPGRADE" set, this function
assumes that the PV will expand when converted to UTF-8, and
skips the extra work of checking for that. Typically this flag
is used by a routine that has already parsed the string and
found such characters, and passes this information on so that
the work doesn't have to be repeated.
Returns the number of bytes in the converted string.
This is not a general purpose byte encoding to Unicode
interface: use the Encode extension for that.
STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_flags(SV *const sv,
const I32 flags)
sv_utf8_upgrade_flags_grow
Like "sv_utf8_upgrade_flags", but has an additional parameter
"extra", which is the number of unused bytes the string of "sv"
is guaranteed to have free after it upon return. This allows
the caller to reserve extra space that it intends to fill, to
avoid extra grows.
"sv_utf8_upgrade", "sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg", and
"sv_utf8_upgrade_flags" are implemented in terms of this
function.
Returns the number of bytes in the converted string (not
including the spares).
STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_flags_grow(SV *const sv,
const I32 flags,
STRLEN extra)
sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg
Like "sv_utf8_upgrade", but doesn't do magic on "sv".
STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg(SV *sv)
sv_vcatpvf
Processes its arguments like "sv_catpvfn" called with a non-
null C-style variable argument list, and appends the formatted
to an SV. Does not handle 'set' magic. See "sv_vcatpvf_mg".
Usually used via its frontend "sv_catpvf".
void sv_vcatpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
va_list *const args)
sv_vcatpvfn
void sv_vcatpvfn(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
const STRLEN patlen,
va_list *const args,
SV **const svargs, const I32 svmax,
bool *const maybe_tainted)
sv_vcatpvfn_flags
Processes its arguments like "vsprintf" and appends the
formatted output to an SV. Uses an array of SVs if the C-style
variable argument list is missing ("NULL"). Argument reordering
(using format specifiers like "%2$d" or "%*2$d") is supported
only when using an array of SVs; using a C-style "va_list"
argument list with a format string that uses argument
reordering will yield an exception.
When running with taint checks enabled, indicates via
"maybe_tainted" if results are untrustworthy (often due to the
use of locales).
If called as "sv_vcatpvfn" or flags has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit
set, calls get magic.
Usually used via one of its frontends "sv_vcatpvf" and
"sv_vcatpvf_mg".
void sv_vcatpvfn_flags(SV *const sv,
const char *const pat,
const STRLEN patlen,
va_list *const args,
SV **const svargs,
const I32 svmax,
bool *const maybe_tainted,
const U32 flags)
sv_vcatpvf_mg
Like "sv_vcatpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.
Usually used via its frontend "sv_catpvf_mg".
void sv_vcatpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
const char *const pat,
va_list *const args)
sv_vsetpvf
Works like "sv_vcatpvf" but copies the text into the SV instead
of appending it. Does not handle 'set' magic. See
"sv_vsetpvf_mg".
Usually used via its frontend "sv_setpvf".
void sv_vsetpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
va_list *const args)
sv_vsetpvfn
Works like "sv_vcatpvfn" but copies the text into the SV
instead of appending it.
Usually used via one of its frontends "sv_vsetpvf" and
"sv_vsetpvf_mg".
void sv_vsetpvfn(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
const STRLEN patlen,
va_list *const args,
SV **const svargs, const I32 svmax,
bool *const maybe_tainted)
sv_vsetpvf_mg
Like "sv_vsetpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.
Usually used via its frontend "sv_setpvf_mg".
void sv_vsetpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
const char *const pat,
va_list *const args)
SV Flags
SVt_INVLIST
Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_IV Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_NULL
Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_NV Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_PV Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_PVAV
Type flag for arrays. See "svtype".
SVt_PVCV
Type flag for subroutines. See "svtype".
SVt_PVFM
Type flag for formats. See "svtype".
SVt_PVGV
Type flag for typeglobs. See "svtype".
SVt_PVHV
Type flag for hashes. See "svtype".
SVt_PVIO
Type flag for I/O objects. See "svtype".
SVt_PVIV
Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_PVLV
Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_PVMG
Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_PVNV
Type flag for scalars. See "svtype".
SVt_REGEXP
Type flag for regular expressions. See "svtype".
svtype An enum of flags for Perl types. These are found in the file
sv.h in the "svtype" enum. Test these flags with the "SvTYPE"
macro.
The types are:
SVt_NULL
SVt_IV
SVt_NV
SVt_RV
SVt_PV
SVt_PVIV
SVt_PVNV
SVt_PVMG
SVt_INVLIST
SVt_REGEXP
SVt_PVGV
SVt_PVLV
SVt_PVAV
SVt_PVHV
SVt_PVCV
SVt_PVFM
SVt_PVIO
These are most easily explained from the bottom up.
"SVt_PVIO" is for I/O objects, "SVt_PVFM" for formats,
"SVt_PVCV" for subroutines, "SVt_PVHV" for hashes and
"SVt_PVAV" for arrays.
All the others are scalar types, that is, things that can be
bound to a "$" variable. For these, the internal types are
mostly orthogonal to types in the Perl language.
Hence, checking "SvTYPE(sv) < SVt_PVAV" is the best way to see
whether something is a scalar.
"SVt_PVGV" represents a typeglob. If "!SvFAKE(sv)", then it is
a real, incoercible typeglob. If "SvFAKE(sv)", then it is a
scalar to which a typeglob has been assigned. Assigning to it
again will stop it from being a typeglob. "SVt_PVLV"
represents a scalar that delegates to another scalar behind the
scenes. It is used, e.g., for the return value of "substr" and
for tied hash and array elements. It can hold any scalar
value, including a typeglob. "SVt_REGEXP" is for regular
expressions. "SVt_INVLIST" is for Perl core internal use only.
"SVt_PVMG" represents a "normal" scalar (not a typeglob,
regular expression, or delegate). Since most scalars do not
need all the internal fields of a PVMG, we save memory by
allocating smaller structs when possible. All the other types
are just simpler forms of "SVt_PVMG", with fewer internal
fields. "SVt_NULL" can only hold undef. "SVt_IV" can hold
undef, an integer, or a reference. ("SVt_RV" is an alias for
"SVt_IV", which exists for backward compatibility.) "SVt_NV"
can hold any of those or a double. "SVt_PV" can only hold
"undef" or a string. "SVt_PVIV" is a superset of "SVt_PV" and
"SVt_IV". "SVt_PVNV" is similar. "SVt_PVMG" can hold anything
"SVt_PVNV" can hold, but it can, but does not have to, be
blessed or magical.
SV Manipulation Functions
boolSV Returns a true SV if "b" is a true value, or a false SV if "b"
is 0.
See also "PL_sv_yes" and "PL_sv_no".
SV * boolSV(bool b)
croak_xs_usage
A specialised variant of "croak()" for emitting the usage
message for xsubs
croak_xs_usage(cv, "eee_yow");
works out the package name and subroutine name from "cv", and
then calls "croak()". Hence if "cv" is &ouch::awk, it would
call "croak" as:
Perl_croak(aTHX_ "Usage: %"SVf"::%"SVf"(%s)", "ouch" "awk",
"eee_yow");
void croak_xs_usage(const CV *const cv,
const char *const params)
get_sv Returns the SV of the specified Perl scalar. "flags" are
passed to "gv_fetchpv". If "GV_ADD" is set and the Perl
variable does not exist then it will be created. If "flags" is
zero and the variable does not exist then NULL is returned.
NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.
SV* get_sv(const char *name, I32 flags)
newRV_inc
Creates an RV wrapper for an SV. The reference count for the
original SV is incremented.
SV* newRV_inc(SV* sv)
newSVpadname
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Creates a new SV containing the pad name.
SV* newSVpadname(PADNAME *pn)
newSVpvn_utf8
Creates a new SV and copies a string (which may contain "NUL"
("\0") characters) into it. If "utf8" is true, calls
"SvUTF8_on" on the new SV. Implemented as a wrapper around
"newSVpvn_flags".
SV* newSVpvn_utf8(NULLOK const char* s, STRLEN len,
U32 utf8)
sv_catpvn_nomg
Like "sv_catpvn" but doesn't process magic.
void sv_catpvn_nomg(SV* sv, const char* ptr,
STRLEN len)
sv_catpv_nomg
Like "sv_catpv" but doesn't process magic.
void sv_catpv_nomg(SV* sv, const char* ptr)
sv_catsv_nomg
Like "sv_catsv" but doesn't process magic.
void sv_catsv_nomg(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
SvCUR Returns the length of the string which is in the SV. See
"SvLEN".
STRLEN SvCUR(SV* sv)
SvCUR_set
Set the current length of the string which is in the SV. See
"SvCUR" and "SvIV_set">.
void SvCUR_set(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
sv_derived_from
Exactly like "sv_derived_from_pv", but doesn't take a "flags"
parameter.
bool sv_derived_from(SV* sv, const char *const name)
sv_derived_from_pv
Exactly like "sv_derived_from_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated
string instead of a string/length pair.
bool sv_derived_from_pv(SV* sv,
const char *const name,
U32 flags)
sv_derived_from_pvn
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is derived from the
specified class at the C level. To check derivation at the
Perl level, call "isa()" as a normal Perl method.
Currently, the only significant value for "flags" is SVf_UTF8.
bool sv_derived_from_pvn(SV* sv,
const char *const name,
const STRLEN len, U32 flags)
sv_derived_from_sv
Exactly like "sv_derived_from_pvn", but takes the name string
in the form of an SV instead of a string/length pair.
bool sv_derived_from_sv(SV* sv, SV *namesv,
U32 flags)
sv_does Like "sv_does_pv", but doesn't take a "flags" parameter.
bool sv_does(SV* sv, const char *const name)
sv_does_pv
Like "sv_does_sv", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of
an SV.
bool sv_does_pv(SV* sv, const char *const name,
U32 flags)
sv_does_pvn
Like "sv_does_sv", but takes a string/length pair instead of an
SV.
bool sv_does_pvn(SV* sv, const char *const name,
const STRLEN len, U32 flags)
sv_does_sv
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV performs a
specific, named role. The SV can be a Perl object or the name
of a Perl class.
bool sv_does_sv(SV* sv, SV* namesv, U32 flags)
SvEND Returns a pointer to the spot just after the last character in
the string which is in the SV, where there is usually a
trailing "NUL" character (even though Perl scalars do not
strictly require it). See "SvCUR". Access the character as
"*(SvEND(sv))".
Warning: If "SvCUR" is equal to "SvLEN", then "SvEND" points to
unallocated memory.
char* SvEND(SV* sv)
SvGAMAGIC
Returns true if the SV has get magic or overloading. If either
is true then the scalar is active data, and has the potential
to return a new value every time it is accessed. Hence you
must be careful to only read it once per user logical operation
and work with that returned value. If neither is true then the
scalar's value cannot change unless written to.
U32 SvGAMAGIC(SV* sv)
SvGROW Expands the character buffer in the SV so that it has room for
the indicated number of bytes (remember to reserve space for an
extra trailing "NUL" character). Calls "sv_grow" to perform
the expansion if necessary. Returns a pointer to the character
buffer. SV must be of type >= "SVt_PV". One alternative is to
call "sv_grow" if you are not sure of the type of SV.
char * SvGROW(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvIOK Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains an
integer.
U32 SvIOK(SV* sv)
SvIOK_notUV
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains a signed
integer.
bool SvIOK_notUV(SV* sv)
SvIOK_off
Unsets the IV status of an SV.
void SvIOK_off(SV* sv)
SvIOK_on
Tells an SV that it is an integer.
void SvIOK_on(SV* sv)
SvIOK_only
Tells an SV that it is an integer and disables all other "OK"
bits.
void SvIOK_only(SV* sv)
SvIOK_only_UV
Tells an SV that it is an unsigned integer and disables all
other "OK" bits.
void SvIOK_only_UV(SV* sv)
SvIOKp Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains an
integer. Checks the private setting. Use "SvIOK" instead.
U32 SvIOKp(SV* sv)
SvIOK_UV
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains an integer
that must be interpreted as unsigned. A non-negative integer
whose value is within the range of both an IV and a UV may be
be flagged as either "SvUOK" or "SVIOK".
bool SvIOK_UV(SV* sv)
SvIsCOW Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV is Copy-On-Write
(either shared hash key scalars, or full Copy On Write scalars
if 5.9.0 is configured for COW).
U32 SvIsCOW(SV* sv)
SvIsCOW_shared_hash
Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is Copy-On-Write
shared hash key scalar.
bool SvIsCOW_shared_hash(SV* sv)
SvIV Coerces the given SV to an integer and returns it. See "SvIVx"
for a version which guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once.
IV SvIV(SV* sv)
SvIV_nomg
Like "SvIV" but doesn't process magic.
IV SvIV_nomg(SV* sv)
SvIV_set
Set the value of the IV pointer in sv to val. It is possible
to perform the same function of this macro with an lvalue
assignment to "SvIVX". With future Perls, however, it will be
more efficient to use "SvIV_set" instead of the lvalue
assignment to "SvIVX".
void SvIV_set(SV* sv, IV val)
SvIVX Returns the raw value in the SV's IV slot, without checks or
conversions. Only use when you are sure "SvIOK" is true. See
also "SvIV".
IV SvIVX(SV* sv)
SvIVx Coerces the given SV to an integer and returns it. Guarantees
to evaluate "sv" only once. Only use this if "sv" is an
expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient
"SvIV".
IV SvIVx(SV* sv)
SvLEN Returns the size of the string buffer in the SV, not including
any part attributable to "SvOOK". See "SvCUR".
STRLEN SvLEN(SV* sv)
SvLEN_set
Set the size of the string buffer for the SV. See "SvLEN".
void SvLEN_set(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvMAGIC_set
Set the value of the MAGIC pointer in "sv" to val. See
"SvIV_set".
void SvMAGIC_set(SV* sv, MAGIC* val)
SvNIOK Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a
number, integer or double.
U32 SvNIOK(SV* sv)
SvNIOK_off
Unsets the NV/IV status of an SV.
void SvNIOK_off(SV* sv)
SvNIOKp Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a
number, integer or double. Checks the private setting. Use
"SvNIOK" instead.
U32 SvNIOKp(SV* sv)
SvNOK Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a
double.
U32 SvNOK(SV* sv)
SvNOK_off
Unsets the NV status of an SV.
void SvNOK_off(SV* sv)
SvNOK_on
Tells an SV that it is a double.
void SvNOK_on(SV* sv)
SvNOK_only
Tells an SV that it is a double and disables all other OK bits.
void SvNOK_only(SV* sv)
SvNOKp Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a
double. Checks the private setting. Use "SvNOK" instead.
U32 SvNOKp(SV* sv)
SvNV Coerce the given SV to a double and return it. See "SvNVx" for
a version which guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once.
NV SvNV(SV* sv)
SvNV_nomg
Like "SvNV" but doesn't process magic.
NV SvNV_nomg(SV* sv)
SvNV_set
Set the value of the NV pointer in "sv" to val. See
"SvIV_set".
void SvNV_set(SV* sv, NV val)
SvNVX Returns the raw value in the SV's NV slot, without checks or
conversions. Only use when you are sure "SvNOK" is true. See
also "SvNV".
NV SvNVX(SV* sv)
SvNVx Coerces the given SV to a double and returns it. Guarantees to
evaluate "sv" only once. Only use this if "sv" is an
expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient
"SvNV".
NV SvNVx(SV* sv)
SvOK Returns a U32 value indicating whether the value is defined.
This is only meaningful for scalars.
U32 SvOK(SV* sv)
SvOOK Returns a U32 indicating whether the pointer to the string
buffer is offset. This hack is used internally to speed up
removal of characters from the beginning of a "SvPV". When
"SvOOK" is true, then the start of the allocated string buffer
is actually "SvOOK_offset()" bytes before "SvPVX". This offset
used to be stored in "SvIVX", but is now stored within the
spare part of the buffer.
U32 SvOOK(SV* sv)
SvOOK_offset
Reads into "len" the offset from "SvPVX" back to the true start
of the allocated buffer, which will be non-zero if "sv_chop"
has been used to efficiently remove characters from start of
the buffer. Implemented as a macro, which takes the address of
"len", which must be of type "STRLEN". Evaluates "sv" more
than once. Sets "len" to 0 if "SvOOK(sv)" is false.
void SvOOK_offset(NN SV*sv, STRLEN len)
SvPOK Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a
character string.
U32 SvPOK(SV* sv)
SvPOK_off
Unsets the PV status of an SV.
void SvPOK_off(SV* sv)
SvPOK_on
Tells an SV that it is a string.
void SvPOK_on(SV* sv)
SvPOK_only
Tells an SV that it is a string and disables all other "OK"
bits. Will also turn off the UTF-8 status.
void SvPOK_only(SV* sv)
SvPOK_only_UTF8
Tells an SV that it is a string and disables all other "OK"
bits, and leaves the UTF-8 status as it was.
void SvPOK_only_UTF8(SV* sv)
SvPOKp Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a
character string. Checks the private setting. Use "SvPOK"
instead.
U32 SvPOKp(SV* sv)
SvPV Returns a pointer to the string in the SV, or a stringified
form of the SV if the SV does not contain a string. The SV may
cache the stringified version becoming "SvPOK". Handles 'get'
magic. The "len" variable will be set to the length of the
string (this is a macro, so don't use &len). See also "SvPVx"
for a version which guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once.
Note that there is no guarantee that the return value of
"SvPV()" is equal to "SvPVX(sv)", or that "SvPVX(sv)" contains
valid data, or that successive calls to "SvPV(sv)" will return
the same pointer value each time. This is due to the way that
things like overloading and Copy-On-Write are handled. In
these cases, the return value may point to a temporary buffer
or similar. If you absolutely need the "SvPVX" field to be
valid (for example, if you intend to write to it), then see
"SvPV_force".
char* SvPV(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVbyte
Like "SvPV", but converts "sv" to byte representation first if
necessary.
char* SvPVbyte(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVbyte_force
Like "SvPV_force", but converts "sv" to byte representation
first if necessary.
char* SvPVbyte_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVbyte_nolen
Like "SvPV_nolen", but converts "sv" to byte representation
first if necessary.
char* SvPVbyte_nolen(SV* sv)
SvPVbytex
Like "SvPV", but converts "sv" to byte representation first if
necessary. Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once; use the more
efficient "SvPVbyte" otherwise.
char* SvPVbytex(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVbytex_force
Like "SvPV_force", but converts "sv" to byte representation
first if necessary. Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once; use
the more efficient "SvPVbyte_force" otherwise.
char* SvPVbytex_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPV_force
Like "SvPV" but will force the SV into containing a string
("SvPOK"), and only a string ("SvPOK_only"), by hook or by
crook. You need force if you are going to update the "SvPVX"
directly. Processes get magic.
Note that coercing an arbitrary scalar into a plain PV will
potentially strip useful data from it. For example if the SV
was "SvROK", then the referent will have its reference count
decremented, and the SV itself may be converted to an "SvPOK"
scalar with a string buffer containing a value such as
"ARRAY(0x1234)".
char* SvPV_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPV_force_nomg
Like "SvPV_force", but doesn't process get magic.
char* SvPV_force_nomg(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPV_nolen
Like "SvPV" but doesn't set a length variable.
char* SvPV_nolen(SV* sv)
SvPV_nomg
Like "SvPV" but doesn't process magic.
char* SvPV_nomg(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPV_nomg_nolen
Like "SvPV_nolen" but doesn't process magic.
char* SvPV_nomg_nolen(SV* sv)
SvPV_set
This is probably not what you want to use, you probably wanted
"sv_usepvn_flags" or "sv_setpvn" or "sv_setpvs".
Set the value of the PV pointer in "sv" to the Perl allocated
"NUL"-terminated string "val". See also "SvIV_set".
Remember to free the previous PV buffer. There are many things
to check. Beware that the existing pointer may be involved in
copy-on-write or other mischief, so do "SvOOK_off(sv)" and use
"sv_force_normal" or "SvPV_force" (or check the "SvIsCOW" flag)
first to make sure this modification is safe. Then finally, if
it is not a COW, call "SvPV_free" to free the previous PV
buffer.
void SvPV_set(SV* sv, char* val)
SvPVutf8
Like "SvPV", but converts "sv" to UTF-8 first if necessary.
char* SvPVutf8(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVutf8x
Like "SvPV", but converts "sv" to UTF-8 first if necessary.
Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once; use the more efficient
"SvPVutf8" otherwise.
char* SvPVutf8x(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVutf8x_force
Like "SvPV_force", but converts "sv" to UTF-8 first if
necessary. Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once; use the more
efficient "SvPVutf8_force" otherwise.
char* SvPVutf8x_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVutf8_force
Like "SvPV_force", but converts "sv" to UTF-8 first if
necessary.
char* SvPVutf8_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvPVutf8_nolen
Like "SvPV_nolen", but converts "sv" to UTF-8 first if
necessary.
char* SvPVutf8_nolen(SV* sv)
SvPVX Returns a pointer to the physical string in the SV. The SV
must contain a string. Prior to 5.9.3 it is not safe to
execute this macro unless the SV's type >= "SVt_PV".
This is also used to store the name of an autoloaded subroutine
in an XS AUTOLOAD routine. See "Autoloading with XSUBs" in
perlguts.
char* SvPVX(SV* sv)
SvPVx A version of "SvPV" which guarantees to evaluate "sv" only
once. Only use this if "sv" is an expression with side
effects, otherwise use the more efficient "SvPV".
char* SvPVx(SV* sv, STRLEN len)
SvREFCNT
Returns the value of the object's reference count.
U32 SvREFCNT(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_dec
Decrements the reference count of the given SV. "sv" may be
"NULL".
void SvREFCNT_dec(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_dec_NN
Same as "SvREFCNT_dec", but can only be used if you know "sv"
is not "NULL". Since we don't have to check the NULLness, it's
faster and smaller.
void SvREFCNT_dec_NN(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc
Increments the reference count of the given SV, returning the
SV.
All of the following "SvREFCNT_inc"* macros are optimized
versions of "SvREFCNT_inc", and can be replaced with
"SvREFCNT_inc".
SV* SvREFCNT_inc(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_NN
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc", but can only be used if you know "sv"
is not "NULL". Since we don't have to check the NULLness, it's
faster and smaller.
SV* SvREFCNT_inc_NN(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_simple
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc", but can only be used with expressions
without side effects. Since we don't have to store a temporary
value, it's faster.
SV* SvREFCNT_inc_simple(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_simple_NN
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc_simple", but can only be used if you know
"sv" is not "NULL". Since we don't have to check the NULLness,
it's faster and smaller.
SV* SvREFCNT_inc_simple_NN(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc_simple", but can only be used if you
don't need the return value. The macro doesn't need to return
a meaningful value.
void SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void_NN
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc", but can only be used if you don't need
the return value, and you know that "sv" is not "NULL". The
macro doesn't need to return a meaningful value, or check for
NULLness, so it's smaller and faster.
void SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void_NN(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_void
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc", but can only be used if you don't need
the return value. The macro doesn't need to return a
meaningful value.
void SvREFCNT_inc_void(SV* sv)
SvREFCNT_inc_void_NN
Same as "SvREFCNT_inc", but can only be used if you don't need
the return value, and you know that "sv" is not "NULL". The
macro doesn't need to return a meaningful value, or check for
NULLness, so it's smaller and faster.
void SvREFCNT_inc_void_NN(SV* sv)
sv_report_used
Dump the contents of all SVs not yet freed (debugging aid).
void sv_report_used()
SvROK Tests if the SV is an RV.
U32 SvROK(SV* sv)
SvROK_off
Unsets the RV status of an SV.
void SvROK_off(SV* sv)
SvROK_on
Tells an SV that it is an RV.
void SvROK_on(SV* sv)
SvRV Dereferences an RV to return the SV.
SV* SvRV(SV* sv)
SvRV_set
Set the value of the RV pointer in "sv" to val. See
"SvIV_set".
void SvRV_set(SV* sv, SV* val)
sv_setsv_nomg
Like "sv_setsv" but doesn't process magic.
void sv_setsv_nomg(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)
SvSTASH Returns the stash of the SV.
HV* SvSTASH(SV* sv)
SvSTASH_set
Set the value of the STASH pointer in "sv" to val. See
"SvIV_set".
void SvSTASH_set(SV* sv, HV* val)
SvTAINT Taints an SV if tainting is enabled, and if some input to the
current expression is tainted--usually a variable, but possibly
also implicit inputs such as locale settings. "SvTAINT"
propagates that taintedness to the outputs of an expression in
a pessimistic fashion; i.e., without paying attention to
precisely which outputs are influenced by which inputs.
void SvTAINT(SV* sv)
SvTAINTED
Checks to see if an SV is tainted. Returns TRUE if it is,
FALSE if not.
bool SvTAINTED(SV* sv)
SvTAINTED_off
Untaints an SV. Be very careful with this routine, as it
short-circuits some of Perl's fundamental security features.
XS module authors should not use this function unless they
fully understand all the implications of unconditionally
untainting the value. Untainting should be done in the
standard perl fashion, via a carefully crafted regexp, rather
than directly untainting variables.
void SvTAINTED_off(SV* sv)
SvTAINTED_on
Marks an SV as tainted if tainting is enabled.
void SvTAINTED_on(SV* sv)
SvTRUE Returns a boolean indicating whether Perl would evaluate the SV
as true or false. See "SvOK" for a defined/undefined test.
Handles 'get' magic unless the scalar is already "SvPOK",
"SvIOK" or "SvNOK" (the public, not the private flags).
bool SvTRUE(SV* sv)
SvTRUE_nomg
Returns a boolean indicating whether Perl would evaluate the SV
as true or false. See "SvOK" for a defined/undefined test.
Does not handle 'get' magic.
bool SvTRUE_nomg(SV* sv)
SvTYPE Returns the type of the SV. See "svtype".
svtype SvTYPE(SV* sv)
SvUOK Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains an integer
that must be interpreted as unsigned. A non-negative integer
whose value is within the range of both an IV and a UV may be
be flagged as either "SvUOK" or "SVIOK".
bool SvUOK(SV* sv)
SvUPGRADE
Used to upgrade an SV to a more complex form. Uses
"sv_upgrade" to perform the upgrade if necessary. See
"svtype".
void SvUPGRADE(SV* sv, svtype type)
SvUTF8 Returns a U32 value indicating the UTF-8 status of an SV. If
things are set-up properly, this indicates whether or not the
SV contains UTF-8 encoded data. You should use this after a
call to "SvPV()" or one of its variants, in case any call to
string overloading updates the internal flag.
If you want to take into account the bytes pragma, use
"DO_UTF8" instead.
U32 SvUTF8(SV* sv)
sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg
Like "sv_utf8_upgrade", but doesn't do magic on "sv".
STRLEN sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg(NN SV *sv)
SvUTF8_off
Unsets the UTF-8 status of an SV (the data is not changed, just
the flag). Do not use frivolously.
void SvUTF8_off(SV *sv)
SvUTF8_on
Turn on the UTF-8 status of an SV (the data is not changed,
just the flag). Do not use frivolously.
void SvUTF8_on(SV *sv)
SvUV Coerces the given SV to an unsigned integer and returns it.
See "SvUVx" for a version which guarantees to evaluate "sv"
only once.
UV SvUV(SV* sv)
SvUV_nomg
Like "SvUV" but doesn't process magic.
UV SvUV_nomg(SV* sv)
SvUV_set
Set the value of the UV pointer in "sv" to val. See
"SvIV_set".
void SvUV_set(SV* sv, UV val)
SvUVX Returns the raw value in the SV's UV slot, without checks or
conversions. Only use when you are sure "SvIOK" is true. See
also "SvUV".
UV SvUVX(SV* sv)
SvUVx Coerces the given SV to an unsigned integer and returns it.
Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once. Only use this if "sv"
is an expression with side effects, otherwise use the more
efficient "SvUV".
UV SvUVx(SV* sv)
SvVOK Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains a
v-string.
bool SvVOK(SV* sv)
Unicode Support
"Unicode Support" in perlguts has an introduction to this API.
See also "Character classification", and "Character case changing".
Various functions outside this section also work specially with
Unicode. Search for the string "utf8" in this document.
bytes_cmp_utf8
Compares the sequence of characters (stored as octets) in "b",
"blen" with the sequence of characters (stored as UTF-8) in
"u", "ulen". Returns 0 if they are equal, -1 or -2 if the
first string is less than the second string, +1 or +2 if the
first string is greater than the second string.
-1 or +1 is returned if the shorter string was identical to the
start of the longer string. -2 or +2 is returned if there was
a difference between characters within the strings.
int bytes_cmp_utf8(const U8 *b, STRLEN blen,
const U8 *u, STRLEN ulen)
bytes_from_utf8
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Converts a string "s" of length "len" from UTF-8 into native
byte encoding. Unlike "utf8_to_bytes" but like
"bytes_to_utf8", returns a pointer to the newly-created string,
and updates "len" to contain the new length. Returns the
original string if no conversion occurs, "len" is unchanged.
Do nothing if "is_utf8" points to 0. Sets "is_utf8" to 0 if
"s" is converted or consisted entirely of characters that are
invariant in UTF-8 (i.e., US-ASCII on non-EBCDIC machines).
U8* bytes_from_utf8(const U8 *s, STRLEN *len,
bool *is_utf8)
bytes_to_utf8
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Converts a string "s" of length "len" bytes from the native
encoding into UTF-8. Returns a pointer to the newly-created
string, and sets "len" to reflect the new length in bytes.
A "NUL" character will be written after the end of the string.
If you want to convert to UTF-8 from encodings other than the
native (Latin1 or EBCDIC), see "sv_recode_to_utf8"().
U8* bytes_to_utf8(const U8 *s, STRLEN *len)
DO_UTF8 Returns a bool giving whether or not the PV in "sv" is to be
treated as being encoded in UTF-8.
You should use this after a call to "SvPV()" or one of its
variants, in case any call to string overloading updates the
internal UTF-8 encoding flag.
bool DO_UTF8(SV* sv)
foldEQ_utf8
Returns true if the leading portions of the strings "s1" and
"s2" (either or both of which may be in UTF-8) are the same
case-insensitively; false otherwise. How far into the strings
to compare is determined by other input parameters.
If "u1" is true, the string "s1" is assumed to be in
UTF-8-encoded Unicode; otherwise it is assumed to be in native
8-bit encoding. Correspondingly for "u2" with respect to "s2".
If the byte length "l1" is non-zero, it says how far into "s1"
to check for fold equality. In other words, "s1"+"l1" will be
used as a goal to reach. The scan will not be considered to be
a match unless the goal is reached, and scanning won't continue
past that goal. Correspondingly for "l2" with respect to "s2".
If "pe1" is non-"NULL" and the pointer it points to is not
"NULL", that pointer is considered an end pointer to the
position 1 byte past the maximum point in "s1" beyond which
scanning will not continue under any circumstances. (This
routine assumes that UTF-8 encoded input strings are not
malformed; malformed input can cause it to read past "pe1").
This means that if both "l1" and "pe1" are specified, and "pe1"
is less than "s1"+"l1", the match will never be successful
because it can never get as far as its goal (and in fact is
asserted against). Correspondingly for "pe2" with respect to
"s2".
At least one of "s1" and "s2" must have a goal (at least one of
"l1" and "l2" must be non-zero), and if both do, both have to
be reached for a successful match. Also, if the fold of a
character is multiple characters, all of them must be matched
(see tr21 reference below for 'folding').
Upon a successful match, if "pe1" is non-"NULL", it will be set
to point to the beginning of the next character of "s1" beyond
what was matched. Correspondingly for "pe2" and "s2".
For case-insensitiveness, the "casefolding" of Unicode is used
instead of upper/lowercasing both the characters, see
<http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr21/> (Case Mappings).
I32 foldEQ_utf8(const char *s1, char **pe1, UV l1,
bool u1, const char *s2, char **pe2,
UV l2, bool u2)
is_ascii_string
This is a misleadingly-named synonym for "is_invariant_string".
On ASCII-ish platforms, the name isn't misleading: the ASCII-
range characters are exactly the UTF-8 invariants. But EBCDIC
machines have more invariants than just the ASCII characters,
so "is_invariant_string" is preferred.
bool is_ascii_string(const U8 *s, STRLEN len)
is_invariant_string
Returns true iff the first "len" bytes of the string "s" are
the same regardless of the UTF-8 encoding of the string (or
UTF-EBCDIC encoding on EBCDIC machines). That is, if they are
UTF-8 invariant. On ASCII-ish machines, all the ASCII
characters and only the ASCII characters fit this definition.
On EBCDIC machines, the ASCII-range characters are invariant,
but so also are the C1 controls and "\c?" (which isn't in the
ASCII range on EBCDIC).
If "len" is 0, it will be calculated using strlen(s), (which
means if you use this option, that "s" can't have embedded
"NUL" characters and has to have a terminating "NUL" byte).
See also "is_utf8_string"(), "is_utf8_string_loclen"(), and
"is_utf8_string_loc"().
bool is_invariant_string(const U8 *s, STRLEN len)
is_utf8_string
Returns true if the first "len" bytes of string "s" form a
valid UTF-8 string, false otherwise. If "len" is 0, it will be
calculated using strlen(s) (which means if you use this option,
that "s" can't have embedded "NUL" characters and has to have a
terminating "NUL" byte). Note that all characters being ASCII
constitute 'a valid UTF-8 string'.
See also "is_invariant_string"(), "is_utf8_string_loclen"(),
and "is_utf8_string_loc"().
bool is_utf8_string(const U8 *s, STRLEN len)
is_utf8_string_loc
Like "is_utf8_string" but stores the location of the failure
(in the case of "utf8ness failure") or the location "s"+"len"
(in the case of "utf8ness success") in the "ep".
See also "is_utf8_string_loclen"() and "is_utf8_string"().
bool is_utf8_string_loc(const U8 *s, STRLEN len,
const U8 **ep)
is_utf8_string_loclen
Like "is_utf8_string"() but stores the location of the failure
(in the case of "utf8ness failure") or the location "s"+"len"
(in the case of "utf8ness success") in the "ep", and the number
of UTF-8 encoded characters in the "el".
See also "is_utf8_string_loc"() and "is_utf8_string"().
bool is_utf8_string_loclen(const U8 *s, STRLEN len,
const U8 **ep, STRLEN *el)
isUTF8_CHAR
Returns the number of bytes beginning at "s" which form a legal
UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC) encoded character, looking no further
than "e-s" bytes into "s". Returns 0 if the sequence
starting at "s" through "e-1" is not well-formed UTF-8.
Note that an INVARIANT character (i.e. ASCII on non-EBCDIC
machines) is a valid UTF-8 character.
STRLEN isUTF8_CHAR(const U8 *s, const U8 *e)
pv_uni_display
Build to the scalar "dsv" a displayable version of the string
"spv", length "len", the displayable version being at most
"pvlim" bytes long (if longer, the rest is truncated and "..."
will be appended).
The "flags" argument can have "UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT" set to
display "isPRINT()"able characters as themselves,
"UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH" to display the "\\[nrfta\\]" as the
backslashed versions (like "\n") ("UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH" is
preferred over "UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT" for "\\").
"UNI_DISPLAY_QQ" (and its alias "UNI_DISPLAY_REGEX") have both
"UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH" and "UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT" turned on.
The pointer to the PV of the "dsv" is returned.
See also "sv_uni_display".
char* pv_uni_display(SV *dsv, const U8 *spv,
STRLEN len, STRLEN pvlim,
UV flags)
sv_cat_decode
"encoding" is assumed to be an "Encode" object, the PV of "ssv"
is assumed to be octets in that encoding and decoding the input
starts from the position which "(PV+*offset)" pointed to.
"dsv" will be concatenated with the decoded UTF-8 string from
"ssv". Decoding will terminate when the string "tstr" appears
in decoding output or the input ends on the PV of "ssv". The
value which "offset" points will be modified to the last input
position on "ssv".
Returns TRUE if the terminator was found, else returns FALSE.
bool sv_cat_decode(SV* dsv, SV *encoding, SV *ssv,
int *offset, char* tstr, int tlen)
sv_recode_to_utf8
"encoding" is assumed to be an "Encode" object, on entry the PV
of "sv" is assumed to be octets in that encoding, and "sv" will
be converted into Unicode (and UTF-8).
If "sv" already is UTF-8 (or if it is not "POK"), or if
"encoding" is not a reference, nothing is done to "sv". If
"encoding" is not an "Encode::XS" Encoding object, bad things
will happen. (See cpan/Encode/encoding.pm and Encode.)
The PV of "sv" is returned.
char* sv_recode_to_utf8(SV* sv, SV *encoding)
sv_uni_display
Build to the scalar "dsv" a displayable version of the scalar
"sv", the displayable version being at most "pvlim" bytes long
(if longer, the rest is truncated and "..." will be appended).
The "flags" argument is as in "pv_uni_display"().
The pointer to the PV of the "dsv" is returned.
char* sv_uni_display(SV *dsv, SV *ssv, STRLEN pvlim,
UV flags)
to_utf8_case
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Instead use the appropriate one of "toUPPER_utf8",
"toTITLE_utf8", "toLOWER_utf8", or "toFOLD_utf8".
"p" contains the pointer to the UTF-8 string encoding the
character that is being converted. This routine assumes that
the character at "p" is well-formed.
"ustrp" is a pointer to the character buffer to put the
conversion result to. "lenp" is a pointer to the length of the
result.
"swashp" is a pointer to the swash to use.
Both the special and normal mappings are stored in
lib/unicore/To/Foo.pl, and loaded by "SWASHNEW", using
lib/utf8_heavy.pl. "special" (usually, but not always, a
multicharacter mapping), is tried first.
"special" is a string, normally "NULL" or "". "NULL" means to
not use any special mappings; "" means to use the special
mappings. Values other than these two are treated as the name
of the hash containing the special mappings, like
"utf8::ToSpecLower".
"normal" is a string like "ToLower" which means the swash
%utf8::ToLower.
Code points above the platform's "IV_MAX" will raise a
deprecation warning, unless those are turned off.
UV to_utf8_case(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
STRLEN *lenp, SV **swashp,
const char *normal,
const char *special)
to_utf8_fold
Instead use "toFOLD_utf8".
UV to_utf8_fold(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
STRLEN *lenp)
to_utf8_lower
Instead use "toLOWER_utf8".
UV to_utf8_lower(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
STRLEN *lenp)
to_utf8_title
Instead use "toTITLE_utf8".
UV to_utf8_title(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
STRLEN *lenp)
to_utf8_upper
Instead use "toUPPER_utf8".
UV to_utf8_upper(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
STRLEN *lenp)
utf8n_to_uvchr
THIS FUNCTION SHOULD BE USED IN ONLY VERY SPECIALIZED
CIRCUMSTANCES. Most code should use "utf8_to_uvchr_buf"()
rather than call this directly.
Bottom level UTF-8 decode routine. Returns the native code
point value of the first character in the string "s", which is
assumed to be in UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC) encoding, and no longer
than "curlen" bytes; *retlen (if "retlen" isn't NULL) will be
set to the length, in bytes, of that character.
The value of "flags" determines the behavior when "s" does not
point to a well-formed UTF-8 character. If "flags" is 0, when
a malformation is found, zero is returned and *retlen is set so
that ("s"+*retlen) is the next possible position in "s" that
could begin a non-malformed character. Also, if UTF-8 warnings
haven't been lexically disabled, a warning is raised.
Various ALLOW flags can be set in "flags" to allow (and not
warn on) individual types of malformations, such as the
sequence being overlong (that is, when there is a shorter
sequence that can express the same code point; overlong
sequences are expressly forbidden in the UTF-8 standard due to
potential security issues). Another malformation example is
the first byte of a character not being a legal first byte.
See utf8.h for the list of such flags. For allowed 0 length
strings, this function returns 0; for allowed overlong
sequences, the computed code point is returned; for all other
allowed malformations, the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is
returned, as these have no determinable reasonable value.
The "UTF8_CHECK_ONLY" flag overrides the behavior when a non-
allowed (by other flags) malformation is found. If this flag
is set, the routine assumes that the caller will raise a
warning, and this function will silently just set "retlen" to
"-1" (cast to "STRLEN") and return zero.
Note that this API requires disambiguation between successful
decoding a "NUL" character, and an error return (unless the
"UTF8_CHECK_ONLY" flag is set), as in both cases, 0 is
returned. To disambiguate, upon a zero return, see if the
first byte of "s" is 0 as well. If so, the input was a "NUL";
if not, the input had an error.
Certain code points are considered problematic. These are
Unicode surrogates, Unicode non-characters, and code points
above the Unicode maximum of 0x10FFFF. By default these are
considered regular code points, but certain situations warrant
special handling for them. If "flags" contains
"UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE", all three classes are
treated as malformations and handled as such. The flags
"UTF8_DISALLOW_SURROGATE", "UTF8_DISALLOW_NONCHAR", and
"UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER" (meaning above the legal Unicode maximum)
can be set to disallow these categories individually.
The flags "UTF8_WARN_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE",
"UTF8_WARN_SURROGATE", "UTF8_WARN_NONCHAR", and
"UTF8_WARN_SUPER" will cause warning messages to be raised for
their respective categories, but otherwise the code points are
considered valid (not malformations). To get a category to
both be treated as a malformation and raise a warning, specify
both the WARN and DISALLOW flags. (But note that warnings are
not raised if lexically disabled nor if "UTF8_CHECK_ONLY" is
also specified.)
It is now deprecated to have very high code points (above
"IV_MAX" on the platforms) and this function will raise a
deprecation warning for these (unless such warnings are turned
off). This value, is typically 0x7FFF_FFFF (2**31 -1) in a
32-bit word.
Code points above 0x7FFF_FFFF (2**31 - 1) were never specified
in any standard, so using them is more problematic than other
above-Unicode code points. Perl invented an extension to UTF-8
to represent the ones above 2**36-1, so it is likely that non-
Perl languages will not be able to read files that contain
these that written by the perl interpreter; nor would Perl
understand files written by something that uses a different
extension. For these reasons, there is a separate set of flags
that can warn and/or disallow these extremely high code points,
even if other above-Unicode ones are accepted. These are the
"UTF8_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT" and "UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT"
flags. These are entirely independent from the deprecation
warning for code points above "IV_MAX". On 32-bit machines, it
will eventually be forbidden to have any code point that needs
more than 31 bits to represent. When that happens, effectively
the "UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT" flag will always be set on
32-bit machines. (Of course "UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER" will treat
all above-Unicode code points, including these, as
malformations; and "UTF8_WARN_SUPER" warns on these.)
On EBCDIC platforms starting in Perl v5.24, the Perl extension
for representing extremely high code points kicks in at
0x3FFF_FFFF (2**30 -1), which is lower than on ASCII. Prior to
that, code points 2**31 and higher were simply unrepresentable,
and a different, incompatible method was used to represent code
points between 2**30 and 2**31 - 1. The flags
"UTF8_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT" and "UTF8_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT" have
the same function as on ASCII platforms, warning and
disallowing 2**31 and higher.
All other code points corresponding to Unicode characters,
including private use and those yet to be assigned, are never
considered malformed and never warn.
UV utf8n_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
STRLEN *retlen, U32 flags)
utf8n_to_uvuni
Instead use "utf8_to_uvchr_buf", or rarely, "utf8n_to_uvchr".
This function was useful for code that wanted to handle both
EBCDIC and ASCII platforms with Unicode properties, but
starting in Perl v5.20, the distinctions between the platforms
have mostly been made invisible to most code, so this function
is quite unlikely to be what you want. If you do need this
precise functionality, use instead
"NATIVE_TO_UNI(utf8_to_uvchr_buf(...))" or
"NATIVE_TO_UNI(utf8n_to_uvchr(...))".
UV utf8n_to_uvuni(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
STRLEN *retlen, U32 flags)
UTF8SKIP
returns the number of bytes in the UTF-8 encoded character
whose first (perhaps only) byte is pointed to by "s".
STRLEN UTF8SKIP(char* s)
utf8_distance
Returns the number of UTF-8 characters between the UTF-8
pointers "a" and "b".
WARNING: use only if you *know* that the pointers point inside
the same UTF-8 buffer.
IV utf8_distance(const U8 *a, const U8 *b)
utf8_hop
Return the UTF-8 pointer "s" displaced by "off" characters,
either forward or backward.
WARNING: do not use the following unless you *know* "off" is
within the UTF-8 data pointed to by "s" *and* that on entry "s"
is aligned on the first byte of character or just after the
last byte of a character.
U8* utf8_hop(const U8 *s, SSize_t off)
utf8_length
Return the length of the UTF-8 char encoded string "s" in
characters. Stops at "e" (inclusive). If "e < s" or if the
scan would end up past "e", croaks.
STRLEN utf8_length(const U8* s, const U8 *e)
utf8_to_bytes
NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be
removed without notice.
Converts a string "s" of length "len" from UTF-8 into native
byte encoding. Unlike "bytes_to_utf8", this over-writes the
original string, and updates "len" to contain the new length.
Returns zero on failure, setting "len" to -1.
If you need a copy of the string, see "bytes_from_utf8".
U8* utf8_to_bytes(U8 *s, STRLEN *len)
utf8_to_uvchr_buf
Returns the native code point of the first character in the
string "s" which is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding; "send"
points to 1 beyond the end of "s". *retlen will be set to the
length, in bytes, of that character.
If "s" does not point to a well-formed UTF-8 character and UTF8
warnings are enabled, zero is returned and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" isn't "NULL") to -1. If those warnings are off, the
computed value, if well-defined (or the Unicode REPLACEMENT
CHARACTER if not), is silently returned, and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" isn't "NULL") so that ("s"+*retlen) is the next
possible position in "s" that could begin a non-malformed
character. See "utf8n_to_uvchr" for details on when the
REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
Code points above the platform's "IV_MAX" will raise a
deprecation warning, unless those are turned off.
UV utf8_to_uvchr_buf(const U8 *s, const U8 *send,
STRLEN *retlen)
utf8_to_uvuni_buf
DEPRECATED! It is planned to remove this function from a
future release of Perl. Do not use it for new code; remove it
from existing code.
Only in very rare circumstances should code need to be dealing
in Unicode (as opposed to native) code points. In those few
cases, use "NATIVE_TO_UNI(utf8_to_uvchr_buf(...))" instead.
Returns the Unicode (not-native) code point of the first
character in the string "s" which is assumed to be in UTF-8
encoding; "send" points to 1 beyond the end of "s". "retlen"
will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.
If "s" does not point to a well-formed UTF-8 character and UTF8
warnings are enabled, zero is returned and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" isn't NULL) to -1. If those warnings are off, the
computed value if well-defined (or the Unicode REPLACEMENT
CHARACTER, if not) is silently returned, and *retlen is set (if
"retlen" isn't NULL) so that ("s"+*retlen) is the next
possible position in "s" that could begin a non-malformed
character. See "utf8n_to_uvchr" for details on when the
REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.
Code points above the platform's "IV_MAX" will raise a
deprecation warning, unless those are turned off.
UV utf8_to_uvuni_buf(const U8 *s, const U8 *send,
STRLEN *retlen)
UVCHR_SKIP
returns the number of bytes required to represent the code
point "cp" when encoded as UTF-8. "cp" is a native (ASCII or
EBCDIC) code point if less than 255; a Unicode code point
otherwise.
STRLEN UVCHR_SKIP(UV cp)
uvchr_to_utf8
Adds the UTF-8 representation of the native code point "uv" to
the end of the string "d"; "d" should have at least
"UVCHR_SKIP(uv)+1" (up to "UTF8_MAXBYTES+1") free bytes
available. The return value is the pointer to the byte after
the end of the new character. In other words,
d = uvchr_to_utf8(d, uv);
is the recommended wide native character-aware way of saying
*(d++) = uv;
This function accepts any UV as input, but very high code
points (above "IV_MAX" on the platform) will raise a
deprecation warning. This is typically 0x7FFF_FFFF in a 32-bit
word.
It is possible to forbid or warn on non-Unicode code points, or
those that may be problematic by using "uvchr_to_utf8_flags".
U8* uvchr_to_utf8(U8 *d, UV uv)
uvchr_to_utf8_flags
Adds the UTF-8 representation of the native code point "uv" to
the end of the string "d"; "d" should have at least
"UVCHR_SKIP(uv)+1" (up to "UTF8_MAXBYTES+1") free bytes
available. The return value is the pointer to the byte after
the end of the new character. In other words,
d = uvchr_to_utf8_flags(d, uv, flags);
or, in most cases,
d = uvchr_to_utf8_flags(d, uv, 0);
This is the Unicode-aware way of saying
*(d++) = uv;
If "flags" is 0, this function accepts any UV as input, but
very high code points (above "IV_MAX" for the platform) will
raise a deprecation warning. This is typically 0x7FFF_FFFF in
a 32-bit word.
Specifying "flags" can further restrict what is allowed and not
warned on, as follows:
If "uv" is a Unicode surrogate code point and
"UNICODE_WARN_SURROGATE" is set, the function will raise a
warning, provided UTF8 warnings are enabled. If instead
"UNICODE_DISALLOW_SURROGATE" is set, the function will fail and
return NULL. If both flags are set, the function will both
warn and return NULL.
Similarly, the "UNICODE_WARN_NONCHAR" and
"UNICODE_DISALLOW_NONCHAR" flags affect how the function
handles a Unicode non-character.
And likewise, the "UNICODE_WARN_SUPER" and
"UNICODE_DISALLOW_SUPER" flags affect the handling of code
points that are above the Unicode maximum of 0x10FFFF.
Languages other than Perl may not be able to accept files that
contain these.
The flag "UNICODE_WARN_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE" selects all three
of the above WARN flags; and
"UNICODE_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE" selects all three
DISALLOW flags.
Code points above 0x7FFF_FFFF (2**31 - 1) were never specified
in any standard, so using them is more problematic than other
above-Unicode code points. Perl invented an extension to UTF-8
to represent the ones above 2**36-1, so it is likely that non-
Perl languages will not be able to read files that contain
these that written by the perl interpreter; nor would Perl
understand files written by something that uses a different
extension. For these reasons, there is a separate set of flags
that can warn and/or disallow these extremely high code points,
even if other above-Unicode ones are accepted. These are the
"UNICODE_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT" and "UNICODE_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT"
flags. These are entirely independent from the deprecation
warning for code points above "IV_MAX". On 32-bit machines, it
will eventually be forbidden to have any code point that needs
more than 31 bits to represent. When that happens, effectively
the "UNICODE_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT" flag will always be set on
32-bit machines. (Of course "UNICODE_DISALLOW_SUPER" will
treat all above-Unicode code points, including these, as
malformations; and "UNICODE_WARN_SUPER" warns on these.)
On EBCDIC platforms starting in Perl v5.24, the Perl extension
for representing extremely high code points kicks in at
0x3FFF_FFFF (2**30 -1), which is lower than on ASCII. Prior to
that, code points 2**31 and higher were simply unrepresentable,
and a different, incompatible method was used to represent code
points between 2**30 and 2**31 - 1. The flags
"UNICODE_WARN_ABOVE_31_BIT" and "UNICODE_DISALLOW_ABOVE_31_BIT"
have the same function as on ASCII platforms, warning and
disallowing 2**31 and higher.
U8* uvchr_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv, UV flags)
uvoffuni_to_utf8_flags
THIS FUNCTION SHOULD BE USED IN ONLY VERY SPECIALIZED
CIRCUMSTANCES. Instead, Almost all code should use
"uvchr_to_utf8" or "uvchr_to_utf8_flags".
This function is like them, but the input is a strict Unicode
(as opposed to native) code point. Only in very rare
circumstances should code not be using the native code point.
For details, see the description for "uvchr_to_utf8_flags".
U8* uvoffuni_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv, UV flags)
uvuni_to_utf8_flags
Instead you almost certainly want to use "uvchr_to_utf8" or
"uvchr_to_utf8_flags".
This function is a deprecated synonym for
"uvoffuni_to_utf8_flags", which itself, while not deprecated,
should be used only in isolated circumstances. These functions
were useful for code that wanted to handle both EBCDIC and
ASCII platforms with Unicode properties, but starting in Perl
v5.20, the distinctions between the platforms have mostly been
made invisible to most code, so this function is quite unlikely
to be what you want.
U8* uvuni_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv, UV flags)
Variables created by "xsubpp" and "xsubpp" internal functions
newXSproto
Used by "xsubpp" to hook up XSUBs as Perl subs. Adds Perl
prototypes to the subs.
XS_APIVERSION_BOOTCHECK
Macro to verify that the perl api version an XS module has been
compiled against matches the api version of the perl
interpreter it's being loaded into.
XS_APIVERSION_BOOTCHECK;
XS_VERSION
The version identifier for an XS module. This is usually
handled automatically by "ExtUtils::MakeMaker". See
"XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK".
XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK
Macro to verify that a PM module's $VERSION variable matches
the XS module's "XS_VERSION" variable. This is usually handled
automatically by "xsubpp". See "The VERSIONCHECK: Keyword" in
perlxs.
XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK;
Warning and Dieing
croak This is an XS interface to Perl's "die" function.
Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list. These
are used to generate a string message. If the message does not
end with a newline, then it will be extended with some
indication of the current location in the code, as described
for "mess_sv".
The error message will be used as an exception, by default
returning control to the nearest enclosing "eval", but subject
to modification by a $SIG{__DIE__} handler. In any case, the
"croak" function never returns normally.
For historical reasons, if "pat" is null then the contents of
"ERRSV" ($@) will be used as an error message or object instead
of building an error message from arguments. If you want to
throw a non-string object, or build an error message in an SV
yourself, it is preferable to use the "croak_sv" function,
which does not involve clobbering "ERRSV".
void croak(const char *pat, ...)
croak_no_modify
Exactly equivalent to "Perl_croak(aTHX_ "%s", PL_no_modify)",
but generates terser object code than using "Perl_croak". Less
code used on exception code paths reduces CPU cache pressure.
void croak_no_modify()
croak_sv
This is an XS interface to Perl's "die" function.
"baseex" is the error message or object. If it is a reference,
it will be used as-is. Otherwise it is used as a string, and
if it does not end with a newline then it will be extended with
some indication of the current location in the code, as
described for "mess_sv".
The error message or object will be used as an exception, by
default returning control to the nearest enclosing "eval", but
subject to modification by a $SIG{__DIE__} handler. In any
case, the "croak_sv" function never returns normally.
To die with a simple string message, the "croak" function may
be more convenient.
void croak_sv(SV *baseex)
die Behaves the same as "croak", except for the return type. It
should be used only where the "OP *" return type is required.
The function never actually returns.
OP * die(const char *pat, ...)
die_sv Behaves the same as "croak_sv", except for the return type. It
should be used only where the "OP *" return type is required.
The function never actually returns.
OP * die_sv(SV *baseex)
vcroak This is an XS interface to Perl's "die" function.
"pat" and "args" are a sprintf-style format pattern and
encapsulated argument list. These are used to generate a
string message. If the message does not end with a newline,
then it will be extended with some indication of the current
location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".
The error message will be used as an exception, by default
returning control to the nearest enclosing "eval", but subject
to modification by a $SIG{__DIE__} handler. In any case, the
"croak" function never returns normally.
For historical reasons, if "pat" is null then the contents of
"ERRSV" ($@) will be used as an error message or object instead
of building an error message from arguments. If you want to
throw a non-string object, or build an error message in an SV
yourself, it is preferable to use the "croak_sv" function,
which does not involve clobbering "ERRSV".
void vcroak(const char *pat, va_list *args)
vwarn This is an XS interface to Perl's "warn" function.
"pat" and "args" are a sprintf-style format pattern and
encapsulated argument list. These are used to generate a
string message. If the message does not end with a newline,
then it will be extended with some indication of the current
location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".
The error message or object will by default be written to
standard error, but this is subject to modification by a
$SIG{__WARN__} handler.
Unlike with "vcroak", "pat" is not permitted to be null.
void vwarn(const char *pat, va_list *args)
warn This is an XS interface to Perl's "warn" function.
Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list. These
are used to generate a string message. If the message does not
end with a newline, then it will be extended with some
indication of the current location in the code, as described
for "mess_sv".
The error message or object will by default be written to
standard error, but this is subject to modification by a
$SIG{__WARN__} handler.
Unlike with "croak", "pat" is not permitted to be null.
void warn(const char *pat, ...)
warn_sv This is an XS interface to Perl's "warn" function.
"baseex" is the error message or object. If it is a reference,
it will be used as-is. Otherwise it is used as a string, and
if it does not end with a newline then it will be extended with
some indication of the current location in the code, as
described for "mess_sv".
The error message or object will by default be written to
standard error, but this is subject to modification by a
$SIG{__WARN__} handler.
To warn with a simple string message, the "warn" function may
be more convenient.
void warn_sv(SV *baseex)
Undocumented functions
The following functions have been flagged as part of the public API, but are currently undocumented. Use them at your own risk, as the interfaces are subject to change. Functions that are not listed in this document are not intended for public use, and should NOT be used under any circumstances. If you feel you need to use one of these functions, first send email to perl5-porters@perl.org <mailto:perl5-porters@perl.org>. It may be that there is a good reason for the function not being documented, and it should be removed from this list; or it may just be that no one has gotten around to documenting it. In the latter case, you will be asked to submit a patch to document the function. Once your patch is accepted, it will indicate that the interface is stable (unless it is explicitly marked otherwise) and usable by you. GetVars Gv_AMupdate PerlIO_clearerr PerlIO_close PerlIO_context_layers PerlIO_eof PerlIO_error PerlIO_fileno PerlIO_fill PerlIO_flush PerlIO_get_base PerlIO_get_bufsiz PerlIO_get_cnt PerlIO_get_ptr PerlIO_read PerlIO_seek PerlIO_set_cnt PerlIO_set_ptrcnt PerlIO_setlinebuf PerlIO_stderr PerlIO_stdin PerlIO_stdout PerlIO_tell PerlIO_unread PerlIO_write amagic_call amagic_deref_call any_dup atfork_lock atfork_unlock av_arylen_p av_iter_p block_gimme call_atexit call_list calloc cast_i32 cast_iv cast_ulong cast_uv ck_warner ck_warner_d ckwarn ckwarn_d clear_defarray clone_params_del clone_params_new croak_memory_wrap croak_nocontext csighandler cx_dump cx_dup cxinc deb deb_nocontext debop debprofdump debstack debstackptrs delimcpy despatch_signals die_nocontext dirp_dup do_aspawn do_binmode do_close do_gv_dump do_gvgv_dump do_hv_dump do_join do_magic_dump do_op_dump do_open do_open9 do_openn do_pmop_dump do_spawn do_spawn_nowait do_sprintf do_sv_dump doing_taint doref dounwind dowantarray dump_eval dump_form dump_indent dump_mstats dump_sub dump_vindent filter_add filter_del filter_read foldEQ_latin1 form_nocontext fp_dup fprintf_nocontext free_global_struct free_tmps get_context get_mstats get_op_descs get_op_names get_ppaddr get_vtbl gp_dup gp_free gp_ref gv_AVadd gv_HVadd gv_IOadd gv_SVadd gv_add_by_type gv_autoload4 gv_autoload_pv gv_autoload_pvn gv_autoload_sv gv_check gv_dump gv_efullname gv_efullname3 gv_efullname4 gv_fetchfile gv_fetchfile_flags gv_fetchpv gv_fetchpvn_flags gv_fetchsv gv_fullname gv_fullname3 gv_fullname4 gv_handler gv_name_set he_dup hek_dup hv_common hv_common_key_len hv_delayfree_ent hv_eiter_p hv_eiter_set hv_free_ent hv_ksplit hv_name_set hv_placeholders_get hv_placeholders_set hv_rand_set hv_riter_p hv_riter_set ibcmp_utf8 init_global_struct init_stacks init_tm instr is_lvalue_sub leave_scope load_module_nocontext magic_dump malloc markstack_grow mess_nocontext mfree mg_dup mg_size mini_mktime moreswitches mro_get_from_name mro_get_private_data mro_set_mro mro_set_private_data my_atof my_atof2 my_bcopy my_bzero my_chsize my_cxt_index my_cxt_init my_dirfd my_exit my_failure_exit my_fflush_all my_fork my_lstat my_memcmp my_memset my_pclose my_popen my_popen_list my_setenv my_socketpair my_stat my_strftime newANONATTRSUB newANONHASH newANONLIST newANONSUB newATTRSUB newAVREF newCVREF newFORM newGVREF newGVgen newGVgen_flags newHVREF newHVhv newIO newMYSUB newPROG newRV newSUB newSVREF newSVpvf_nocontext new_stackinfo op_refcnt_lock op_refcnt_unlock parser_dup perl_alloc_using perl_clone_using pmop_dump pop_scope pregcomp pregexec pregfree pregfree2 printf_nocontext ptr_table_fetch ptr_table_free ptr_table_new ptr_table_split ptr_table_store push_scope re_compile re_dup_guts re_intuit_start re_intuit_string realloc reentrant_free reentrant_init reentrant_retry reentrant_size ref reg_named_buff_all reg_named_buff_exists reg_named_buff_fetch reg_named_buff_firstkey reg_named_buff_nextkey reg_named_buff_scalar regdump regdupe_internal regexec_flags regfree_internal reginitcolors regnext repeatcpy rsignal rsignal_state runops_debug runops_standard rvpv_dup safesyscalloc safesysfree safesysmalloc safesysrealloc save_I16 save_I32 save_I8 save_adelete save_aelem save_aelem_flags save_alloc save_aptr save_ary save_bool save_clearsv save_delete save_destructor save_destructor_x save_freeop save_freepv save_freesv save_generic_pvref save_generic_svref save_hash save_hdelete save_helem save_helem_flags save_hints save_hptr save_int save_item save_iv save_list save_long save_mortalizesv save_nogv save_op save_padsv_and_mortalize save_pptr save_pushi32ptr save_pushptr save_pushptrptr save_re_context save_scalar save_set_svflags save_shared_pvref save_sptr save_svref save_vptr savestack_grow savestack_grow_cnt scan_num scan_vstring seed set_context set_numeric_local set_numeric_radix set_numeric_standard share_hek si_dup ss_dup stack_grow start_subparse str_to_version sv_2iv sv_2pv sv_2uv sv_catpvf_mg_nocontext sv_catpvf_nocontext sv_dup sv_dup_inc sv_peek sv_pvn_nomg sv_setpvf_mg_nocontext sv_setpvf_nocontext sys_init sys_init3 sys_intern_clear sys_intern_dup sys_intern_init sys_term taint_env taint_proper unlnk unsharepvn utf16_to_utf8 utf16_to_utf8_reversed uvuni_to_utf8 vdeb vform vload_module vnewSVpvf vwarner warn_nocontext warner warner_nocontext whichsig whichsig_pv whichsig_pvn whichsig_sv
AUTHORS
Until May 1997, this document was maintained by Jeff Okamoto <okamoto@corp.hp.com>. It is now maintained as part of Perl itself. With lots of help and suggestions from Dean Roehrich, Malcolm Beattie, Andreas Koenig, Paul Hudson, Ilya Zakharevich, Paul Marquess, Neil Bowers, Matthew Green, Tim Bunce, Spider Boardman, Ulrich Pfeifer, Stephen McCamant, and Gurusamy Sarathy. API Listing originally by Dean Roehrich <roehrich@cray.com>. Updated to be autogenerated from comments in the source by Benjamin Stuhl.
SEE ALSO
perlguts, perlxs, perlxstut, perlintern
Opportunity
Personal Opportunity - Free software gives you access to billions of dollars of software at no cost. Use this software for your business, personal use or to develop a profitable skill. Access to source code provides access to a level of capabilities/information that companies protect though copyrights. Open source is a core component of the Internet and it is available to you. Leverage the billions of dollars in resources and capabilities to build a career, establish a business or change the world. The potential is endless for those who understand the opportunity.
Business Opportunity - Goldman Sachs, IBM and countless large corporations are leveraging open source to reduce costs, develop products and increase their bottom lines. Learn what these companies know about open source and how open source can give you the advantage.
Free Software
Free Software provides computer programs and capabilities at no cost but more importantly, it provides the freedom to run, edit, contribute to, and share the software. The importance of free software is a matter of access, not price. Software at no cost is a benefit but ownership rights to the software and source code is far more significant.
Free Office Software - The Libre Office suite provides top desktop productivity tools for free. This includes, a word processor, spreadsheet, presentation engine, drawing and flowcharting, database and math applications. Libre Office is available for Linux or Windows.
Free Books
The Free Books Library is a collection of thousands of the most popular public domain books in an online readable format. The collection includes great classical literature and more recent works where the U.S. copyright has expired. These books are yours to read and use without restrictions.
Source Code - Want to change a program or know how it works? Open Source provides the source code for its programs so that anyone can use, modify or learn how to write those programs themselves. Visit the GNU source code repositories to download the source.
Education
Study at Harvard, Stanford or MIT - Open edX provides free online courses from Harvard, MIT, Columbia, UC Berkeley and other top Universities. Hundreds of courses for almost all major subjects and course levels. Open edx also offers some paid courses and selected certifications.
Linux Manual Pages - A man or manual page is a form of software documentation found on Linux/Unix operating systems. Topics covered include computer programs (including library and system calls), formal standards and conventions, and even abstract concepts.
